CV P-309/307

O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L

IMPORTANT —Check your power supply—
Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual.

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to perform the replacement.
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi-

The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufﬁcient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless speciﬁcally authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims ﬁled under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modiﬁed. Implied warranties may also be affected. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The

cates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.
CVP-309 (grand piano type)

CVP-309/307

information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations without notice or obligation to update existing units.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following:
92-469 1 (bottom)

Model Serial No. Purchase Date

PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.

Water warning
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

Fire warning
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

Do not open
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

If you notice any abnormality
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

Location
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Assembly
• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury.

(1)B-7

1/2

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

3

Connections
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

Using the bench (If included)
• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • (CVP-309 including grand piano type) Do not attempt to adjust the bench height while sitting on the bench, since this can cause excessive force to be imposed on the adjustment mechanism, possibly resulting in damage to the mechanism or even injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool.

Maintenance
• (CVP-309 including grand piano type) Gently remove dust and dirt with a soft cloth. Do not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the instrument's ﬁnish. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

Handling caution
• Take care that the key cover does not pinch your ﬁngers, and do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • (CVP-309 including grand piano type) Bumping the surface of the instrument with metal, porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the ﬁnish to crack or peel. Use caution. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Data in the USER tab display (page 26) may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a ﬂoppy disk, SmartMedia card, or external media. When you change settings in a display page and then exit from that page, System Setup data (listed in the Parameter Chart of the separate Data List booklet) is automatically stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off the power without properly exiting from the relevant display.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

(1)B-7

2/2

4

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

.. • This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance.. This section contains additional information such as Troubleshooting and Speciﬁcations..
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
5
.. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws... MIDI Data Format.. and tambra. music box. kanoon.. this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended.... • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only... banjo.
Data List
Voice List.. gender. hackbrett... reverse-compiled..5428708..5567901 from IVL Technologies Ltd.... carillon. and No........ bagpipe. • The following instruments...
• The photos of the harpsichord.. This section explains how to use the basic operations including displaybased controls...S. Quick Guide (page 23).. As a result..... shown in the displays of the CVP-309/307.. hand bell. shanai. sitar... • This product is manufactured under license of U.
About this Owner’s Manual and Data List
This manual consists of the following sections. • Copying of the commercially available software is strictly prohibited except for your personal use... mandolin.. nor may it be sold. MIDI ﬁles. Reference (page 72) .. without limitation. all computer software. DON’T MAKE.. NF is used with the patented LZW.. • The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English....5231671. Ltd.... rabab......Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Clavinova! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the Clavinova. shown in the displays of the CVP-309/307. WAVE data and sound recordings.. This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights.. Ltd.. Kunitachi College of Music. oud.. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders....
Trademarks:
• • • • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer. dulcimer and cimbalom.. kalimba.
Owner’s Manual
Introduction (page 12). Patents No. gamelan gong. style ﬁles... SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation... reverse-assembled or copied. Basic Operation (page 57). Appendix (page 201).. bandoneon............ Inc. NF may not be reverse-engineered... pan ﬂute.... Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. an embedded Internet browser from ACCESS Co.... NF may not be separated from this product...... Ltd... pungi.. santur....... steel drum. This software includes a module developed by the Independent JPEG Group.. Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.... This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions. and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.. This section explains how to use the basic functions. Also. are courtesy of the Gakkigaku Shiryokan (Collection for Organolgy)..... Such copyrighted materials include. etc. No.
• The models CVP-309/307 will be referred to as the CVP/Clavinova in this Owner’s Manual. Please read this section ﬁrst.... • The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co.. lent or transferred in any way. are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of Musical Instruments: balafon.5301259.. harp. No. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.. licensed from Unisys Co...... • This product utilizes NF..

depending on your locale: Floppy Disk Drive SmartMedia card Bench
■ Tuning
Unlike an acoustic piano. make sure all screws are properly tightened and have not been loosened by moving the instrument. When transporting the assembled Clavinova. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition it was in when you ﬁrst took it out of the box. Transport the keyboard horizontally. It always stays perfectly in tune. you can transport the Clavinova along with other belongings. the Clavinova does not need to be tuned.
6
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.Accessories
Guide to Yamaha Online Member Product User Registration “50 greats for the Piano” Music Book Owner’s Manual Data List
The following items may be included or optional. Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock.
■ Transporting
If you move to another location.

....... you can reconﬁgure the entire Clavinova for optimum piano performance..
PIANO
Playing Other Instrument Voices ............. and hear the sound expand around you. The overall sound is deeper and more resonant.. page 28 With just the press of a button... or playing the same key quickly and having perfect articulation without the sound cutting off unnaturally...... or playing the same key quickly and having perfect articulation without the sound cutting off unnaturally.... realistically recreating the hardness of the keys.... to reproduce as closely as possible the experience of playing an actual acoustic grand piano. the higher keys light... The authentic touch and feel of the keys goes far beyond existing electronic keyboards.... Moreover..................... and all the natural gradations in between..... both acoustic and electronic... realistic keyboard response – much like the playing feel of a grand piano – with the lower keys being heavy in touch.... this specially crafted keyboard lets you use techniques only possible on grand pianos. especially when using the damper pedal.... such as playing the same note successively and having the sounds blend smoothly even without use of the damper pedal..
ORGAN FLUTES
10
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
......
Playing the Clavinova
Playing Piano Voices ........... Moreover. such as playing the same note successively and having the sounds blend smoothly even without use of the damper pedal.... but also features an exceptionally wide variety of authentic instruments..page 31 The Clavinova gives you not only various realistic piano Voices. as if you’re playing on stage in a concert hall.......... recreating and emphasizing the natural sounds of true acoustic instruments...
Introduction
The Acoustic Ambience of a Grand Piano —with the iAFC Feature
Turn on the iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect.. GH3 Keyboard (CVP-307) This feature provides authentic. this specially crafted keyboard lets you use techniques only possible on grand pianos... the balance between the weight of the key and hammer.. no matter what settings you’ve made from the panel. light in the high register – to make you feel as if you’re playing a real grand piano. and the characteristic weight gradations of the keys – heavy in the low end.. Now you can enjoy performing and practicing with authentic grand piano sounds and response—instantly...Welcome to the Wonderful Musical World of the Clavinova CVP!
Authentic Acoustic Piano-like Touch
Natural Wood Keyboard (CVP-309 including grand piano type) The special Natural Wood keyboard of the CVP-309 uses real-wood white keys.

....................... It’s like having an expert ensemble playing behind you.............. is an excellent practice tool...................... and save them to internal memory or a SmartMedia card..page 170 The Clavinova also connects directly to the Internet............ ........ —performance assistant technology ...... since they indicate the notes you should play.................. Latin.................. letting you listen back to your playing and spot your strong and weak points...............................
SONG SELECT
Introduction
.... while you play melodies on top................... page 44 Use the Style playback features to automatically produce full backing parts and accompaniment.........
SCORE
REC
Expand Your Song Collection
Internet Direct Connection............ Recording Your Performances ..... Playing Melodies along with Auto Accompaniment.. jazz............ page 34 Play along with previously recorded Song data.................
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
11
.................. —Style Playback........ Select an accompaniment Style—such as pop.......... and how long you should hold them down..... when you should play them.......page 56 While playing back a Song.......— and let the Clavinova be your backing band!
STYLE SELECT
Practicing
Displaying and Playing along with the Music Score ................... Ease in Playing Backing Parts with Songs........................................ Guide Lamps..... letting you download Song data from special websites.........Perform Along with a Full Band —Song Playback . page 41 The Clavinova lets you easily record your own performances and save them to internal memory or a SmartMedia card. too.......... etc............... you can have the music score (notation) automatically shown on the display—an exceptionally convenient tool for learning and practicing pieces.... page 42 The new performance assistant technology features make it exceptionally easy to play professional-sounding backing parts along with Song playback... This........ and ﬁll out your solo performance with the sounds and arrangement of an entire band or orchestra........page 38 The key guide lamps are also helpful in learning and practicing.

Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove.
Introduction
(The shape of the plug and outlet differ depending on locale.
CAUTION Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover.
3
Turning the power on Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on. short circuit. ﬁre or other serious damage to the instrument.)
2
Opening the key cover Using the hand grip on the front. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall.
CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your ﬁngers when opening the cover.
14
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. especially children’s) between the cover and the unit.
CAUTION Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. lift open the key cover. The display located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up. This could cause electric shock.
The power indicator lights up. Be careful to avoid catching ﬁngers (yours or others.Playing the Keyboard
1
Connecting the power cable First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova.

Closing the key cover Grip the metal rim at the top of the panel. adjust the volume level by using the [MASTER VOLUME] located at the left of the panel.
CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your ﬁngers when closing the cover. The screen and the power indicator turn off.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
15
.
Introduction
Adjusting the volume While playing the keyboard. and close the key cover.4
Playing the keyboard Play the keyboard to produce sound.
5 6
Turning the power off Press the [POWER] switch to turn the power off.

The music rest will not close unless the sheet music braces are also closed.
To Open
To Close
Lid (CVP-309 grand piano type)
One long stay and one short stay are provided on the lid.
Sheet Music Braces
These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place. when lowering the music rest. 2 Flip down the two metal supports at the left and the right on the rear of the music rest.
16
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. When raised. When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay.
2 1 3
2 Raise and hold the right side of the lid (viewed from the keyboard end of the instrument). the music rest is ﬁxed at a certain angle and cannot be adjusted.Setting Up the Clavinova
Music Rest
To Raise the Music Rest:
CAUTION Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. 3 Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down. then turn it back slowly.
CVP-309 grand piano type
CVP-309/307
Close the sheet music braces
CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your ﬁngers. ■ To open the lid: 1 Raise the music rest as described in “Music Rest” above. 3 Raise the lid stay and carefully lower the lid so that the end of the stay ﬁts into the recess in the lid.
CAUTION Before lowering the music rest. Also. do not release your hands from the music rest until it is all the way up or down.
CVP-309/307
CAUTION When raising or lowering the music rest. 2 Raise the two metal supports until they are ﬂat against the rear surface of the music rest. close the sheet music braces (see below). let the music rest all the way down before releasing it. 3 Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports.
To Lower the Music Rest:
CVP-309 grand piano type 1 Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go. CVP-309 grand piano type
Introduction
CVP-309 grand piano type 1 Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go. Use one of them to open the lid to the desired angle. open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess. CVP-309/307 Lift the music rest slightly.
To turn on the iAFC (page 76). CVP-309/307 Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go. the iAFC will not be turned on.

Using Headphones
For the longer stay. • Be careful that you or others do not bump the stay while the lid is raised.
CAUTION Do not listen with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time. press the [5†]/[6†] (SPEAKER) button to select “OFF.
1 3 2
Using Headphones
Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks located on the bottom left of the instrument. LINE IN
MIC. Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be connected. 3 Carefully lower the lid. the lid may fall. use the inner recess. If the stay is not properly seated in the recess.
17
.
Introduction
Longer stay
Shorter stay
CAUTION • Make sure that the end of the stay ﬁts securely in the lid recess. Doing so may cause hearing loss. and for the shorter stay. Otherwise. the speakers will not sound and you can only hear the Clavinova sound via the headphones. 2 Hold the lid in its raised position and lower the lid stay.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual CAUTION Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger. the Clavinova or the hanger may be damaged. causing damage or injury. [FUNCTION]→ [I] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] CONFIG 2 2 Press the [5†]/[6†] (SPEAKER) button to select “ON. (If you are using only one pair of headphones.” Outputting sound only from the headphones From the display called up in step 1 above. you can plug them into either of these jacks. • Be careful to avoid catching ﬁngers (yours or others. use the outer recess to support the lid.
■ To close the lid: 1 Hold the lid stay and carefully raise the lid.
Outputting sound from the speaker while headphones are connected 1 Call up the operation display.” When “OFF” is selected. The stay may be bumped out of the lid recess causing the lid to fall. Install the headphone hanger using included two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the ﬁgure. LINE
PHONES
Using the Headphone Hanger
A headphone hanger is included in the Clavinova package so that you can hang the headphones on the Clavinova. especially children’s) when raising or lowering the lid.)
INPUT VOLUME
MIN MAX
MIC.

Changing the Display Language
Changing the Display Language
This determines the language used in the display for messages.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Display Settings
Adjusting the Contrast of the Display
You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [LCD CONTRAST] knob located to the left of the display. and character input. [FUNCTION] → [I] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] OWNER Press the [4π†]/[5π†] button to select a language.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
18
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. ﬁle names.
Introduction
1 2
Call up the operation display.

If you want to reduce this time. press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button then press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main display. Refer to page 67 for character-entry details.
1 2
Call up the operation display. the selected background will not be displayed when the power is turned on again unless the same media containing the data has been inserted into the drive. the background may take some time to appear.
Displaying the version number To check the version number of this instrument. If you select a picture ﬁle on the SmartMedia card. Make sure to use images no larger than 640 x 480 pixels. save the background from the CARD/USB drive to the USER drive of the Picture Selection display. The newly selected picture is shown as the background of the Main display. If you select a picture ﬁle on the CARD/USB drive.
Importing a favorite picture for the Main display background Even though a variety of pictures are available on the Preset drive. press and hold the [I] (OWNER NAME) button in the display in step 2 above. [FUNCTION] → [I] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] OWNER Press the [I] (OWNER NAME) button and call up the Owner Name display.
Introduction
Entering the Owner Name in the Opening Display
You can have your name appear in the opening display (the display that ﬁrst appears when the power is turned on).Display Settings
After selecting.
20
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. you can load your own favorite picture data from SmartMedia card to the Clavinova for use as background. etc.
The explanation about picture compatibility at right applies also to the background of the Song Lyrics display.

make sure that the disk's write-protect tab is set to the “overwrite” position (tab closed).
Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head
• Clean the read/write head regularly. will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. or deletion of data. A ﬂoppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data-read and -write errors. Make sure to check beforehand whether or not the disk contains important data. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the ﬂoppy disk inside. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or ﬂoppy disks. you may need to format them.
* Access of the disk indicates an active operation. Follow the important precautions below. Always keep ﬂoppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use.
Formatting a Floppy Disk
• If you ﬁnd that you are unable to use new. or excessive humidity. playback. and follow these precautions:
• Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Keep in mind that all data on the disk will be lost after formatting.
Removing a Floppy Disk
• After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the ﬂoppy disk (checking that the use lamp on the ﬂoppy disk drive is off). If the ﬂoppy disk cannot be removed because it is stuck. towards the disk slot.
• Be sure to remove the ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. or try re-inserting the disk and attempt to eject it again. rendering it unreadable. • Never use a ﬂoppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. see page 212. If a ﬂoppy disk is inserted while the power is on. the disk is automatically accessed. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which. extremely high or low temperatures. since magnetic ﬁelds can partially or completely erase data on the disk. depending on your locale. blank disks or old disks that have been used with other devices.
Inserting/Removing Floppy Disks Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive:
• Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward. n
Never insert anything but ﬂoppy disks into the disk drive. Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk but also damage to the ﬂoppy disk drive. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic ﬁelds.) The ﬂoppy disk drive lets you save original data you’ve created on the instrument to ﬂoppy disk. speakers. motors.
CAUTION
Do not remove the ﬂoppy disk or turn off the instrument itself while the disk is being accessed. such as recording. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper headcleaning disks. slide the disk's write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open).
About Floppy Disks Handle ﬂoppy disks with care. When the ﬂoppy disk is ejected. For details on how to format a disk.
Write-protect tab open (protect position)
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
21
.Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks
(The ﬂoppy disk drive may be included or optional.
To Protect Your Data (Write-protect Tab):
• To prevent accidental erasure of important data. such as those produced by televisions. Be sure to handle ﬂoppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. after an extended period of use. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a ﬂoppy disk. and allows you to load data from ﬂoppy disk to the instrument. slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. but instead try pressing the eject button again. see page 62. Carefully insert the disk into the slot.
Introduction
Floppy Disk Compatibility
• 3. since the instrument checks whether the disk has data. etc. pull it out of the drive. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. n
Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be useable as is on other devices. • To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month.5" 2DD and 2HD type ﬂoppy disks can be used. dust or liquids. do not try to force it. When saving data.. For instructions on installing the ﬂoppy disk drive. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight. ﬁrmly press the eject button at the upper right of the disk slot all the way in.

speakers. Before you touch a SmartMedia card. This instrument features a built-in SmartMedia card slot (on the front panel). Make sure to check beforehand whether or not the card contains important data. 4MB. When the SmartMedia card is ejected. • Be sure to remove the SmartMedia card from the SmartMedia slot when it is not in use for a long time. until it clicks into place.
Formatting SmartMedia Cards
If you ﬁnd that you are unable to use new.3V (3V) SmartMedia can be used. and 128MB) can be used with the instrument. • SmartMedia cards of seven different memory capacities of (2MB. be aware that the instrument will automatically access the SmartMedia to check the media type when it is inserted while the instrument is turned on. n
SmartMedia cards formatted on this device may or may not be useable as is on other devices. and allows you to load data from a card to the instrument.
* Accessing includes saving. such as those produced by televisions. motors. • Do not reuse a seal that has been peeled off.
To Protect Your Data (Write-protect):
• To prevent inadvertent erasure of important data. loading. Keep in mind that all data on the card will be lost after formatting. 64MB. It lets you save original data you’ve created on the instrument to a SmartMedia card. do not try to force it. • Do not insert the SmartMedia card in the wrong direction.. Conversely.
22
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. or excessive humidity. • Do not touch the gold-plated terminals of the SmartMedia card or put any metallic plate onto the terminals. to save data on the SmartMedia card. and follow these precautions:
• There are times when static electricity affects SmartMedia. touch something metallic such as a door knob and aluminum sash. • Do not insert anything other than a SmartMedia card in the slot. • Do not expose the SmartMedia to direct sunlight.
Removing SmartMedia Cards
• After making sure that the instrument is not accessing* the SmartMedia card. For details on how to format a SmartMedia card. etc. to reduce the possibility of static electricity. Be sure to handle SmartMedia cards with care. • Do not expose the SmartMedia card to magnetic ﬁelds.
Compatible SmartMedia Types
• 3. insert the card until it clicks into place and release it. 16MB. The SSFDC Forum is a voluntary organization established for the promotion of SmartMedia. rendering it unreadable. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. If the card cannot be removed because it is stuck. but instead try re-inserting the card completely into the slot and attempt to eject it again. blank SmartMedia cards or cards that have been used with other devices. Follow the important precautions below.
Introduction
About SmartMedia Cards Handle SmartMedia cards with care. make sure to remove the write-protect seal from the card. extremely high or low temperatures. deleting and making directory. 5V type SmartMedia is not compatible with this instrument. n
SSFDC is an abbreviation for Solid State Floppy Disk Card (another name for SmartMedia cards). Doing so can damage the data on the instrument or card and possibly damage the SmartMedia card itself. 32MB. see page 62. Also. since magnetic ﬁelds can partially or completely erase data on the SmartMedia. formatting. SmartMedia cards greater than 32MB can be used if they conform to the SSFDC Forum standard. dust or liquids.
CAUTION
Never attempt to remove the SmartMedia card or turn the power off during accessing. pull it out of the drive.Handling SmartMedia *Memory Cards
TM
*SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
Inserting/Removing SmartMedia Cards Inserting SmartMedia Cards
• Insert the SmartMedia card with the terminal (goldplated) side face down into the card slot. you may need to format them. 8MB. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a SmartMedia. afﬁx the write-protect seal (provided in the SmartMedia package) onto the designated area (within the circle) of the SmartMedia card. • Do not place heavy objects on a SmartMedia card or bend or apply pressure to the card in any way.

1
Press the [HELP] button to call up the language selection display. the Demos are an interactive “mini-manual”—complete with sound demonstrations and text showing what it can do for you.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
23
. the display returns to the MAIN display.
When the Demo stops.
Demos will play back continuously until stopped.
DEMO
3
Press the [EXIT] button to stop the Demo playback. functions and operations of the instrument.Quick Guide
Playing the Demos
The Demos are more than just songs—they also provide helpful.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 2
Press the [DEMO] button to start the Demos.
DEMO
Quick Guide
1
Select the desired Language.
1
2
Press the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons to select the desired language. easy-to-understand introductions to the features. In a way.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
3
Press the [EXIT] button to exit from Demo.Showing Speciﬁc Demo Topics
1
π π Press the [7π†]/[8π†] buttons in the Demo display to call up the speciﬁc Demo menu.
A F B G
C
H
D
I
E
J
When the Demo has more than one screen.
24
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Quick Guide
2
Press one of the [A]–[I] buttons to show a speciﬁc Demo. press the [J] button.
To return back to the previous display. Press a [π†] button corresponding to the screen number.

5 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3. 3 [DIRECT ACCESS] and [EXIT] buttons Here’s a convenient way to return to the Main display from any other display: Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button.
2
A F
B
G
SONG SELECT
C H
D
I
1
E
J
3.
1
A
1
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
3 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3
8
Operation of the File Selection Display
In the File Selection display. pressing the [1π] button will increase the Song (page 34) volume.
n About information in the Main display See page 59. There are three basic displays: Main display ➤ File selection display ➤ Function display ➤ See below. page 26
Operation of the Main Display
The Main display shows the basic settings and important information for the instrument (It is the same display that appears when the instrument is turned on. press the [F] button.
Quick Guide
1 [A]–[J] buttons The [A]–[J] buttons correspond to the settings indicated next to the buttons. For example. you should know a little about the basic displays that appear in the Quick Guide. etc.Operations in the Basic Displays
To start with. you can select the Voice (page 28)/Song (page 34)/Style (page 44).You can also call up display pages related to the displayed function from the Main display. See below.). In the example here. π π 2 [1π†]–[8π†] buttons The [1π†]–[8π†] buttons correspond to the parameters which are indicated above the buttons. 5
8
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
25
. then the [EXIT] button. and the Voice (RIGHT 1) selection display will appear in the display. we’ll call up and use the Song Selection display. For example.

USER . The page indications are shown at the bottom of the display.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
When the drive contains more than ten Songs. the display is divided up into several pages..1 2
Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display. Press one of the [1π]–[6π] buttons to select a page.
You can also select a Song by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
Operation of the Function Display
In the Function display.......
Categories of detailed settings are shown..).
5 6
Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song..” Step 2. Internal memory to which the preprogrammed data are installed as preset data.. In the example here.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display... then press the [ENTER] button to execute. About PRESET/USER/CARD
PRESET .
4
Select a page (if the display has several pages).
Several Songs may be together in a folder.. CARD . you can make detailed settings. with the CVP’s card slot. “USB” will be displayed on the File Selection display (See page 190. the folder(s) will appear in the display (see the illustration at right)........ For transferring data to and from SmartMedia..
Press the TAB [√]/[®] buttons to select the desired drive (PRESET/USER/CARD).
3
Select a folder (if necessary)....... Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a folder... Internal memory that allows both reading and writing of data.
26
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
...........
Quick Guide
n When the USB storage device such as the Floppy Disk drive will be connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] connector. we’ll call up and use the keyboard touch sensitivity setting display.... “Using USB Storage Devices. In this case...

Throughout this manual.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
27
. the instructions above can be indicated in shorthand as: [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [®] KEYBOARD/PANEL → [A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH. arrows are used in the instructions.
When the setting is further divided into additional settings. a list will be shown in the display. For example.
A
B
C
D
E
Quick Guide
3
Press the TAB [®] button to select the KEYBOARD/PANEL tab.
When the selected category is further divided into sub-categories.
4
Press the [A] button to select the “1 INITIAL TOUCH. the tab(s) will be shown in the display.”
4
A B C
D
E
5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
5
Press the [1π†]/[2π†] button to select touch sensitivity for the keyboard. indicating in shorthand the process of calling up certain displays and functions.2
Press the [D] button to select the category CONTROLLER.

until a message appears prompting you to enable Piano Lock.
PIANO
Piano Lock Function
The convenient Piano Lock function lets you “lock” the piano so that you don’t inadvertently change the settings by pressing another button on the panel. easy-to-use feature completely and automatically reconﬁgures the entire CVP for optimum piano performance. we’ll call up and play the piano voice.
Press the piano-shaped [PIANO] button on the lower right of the panel.
28
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.Playing Voices
The Clavinova features a variety of Voices. Once locked.
VOICE buttons (page 31) METRONOME [ON/OFF] button (page 30)
ORGAN FLUTES
Quick Guide
PIANO
[PIANO] button (see below)
Playing the Piano Voice
Here. you can instantly call up the piano settings by a single button press. even if other buttons are pressed—preventing you from accidentally starting a Song (page 34) during your piano performance. the CVP stays in the piano mode. No matter what settings you’ve made from the panel. including exceptionally realistic piano Voices. Press the [F] (OK) button to enable Piano Lock. To turn Piano Lock off. hold down the [PIANO] button again for a short time.
One-touch Piano Play
This convenient.
1 2 3
Hold down the [PIANO] button on the lower right of the panel for a short time. You can play the piano voice using the pedals or metronome.

● Sostenuto Pedal (Center) If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while holding the note(s). you can specify the ﬁxed volume level by pressing the [4π†] button. sustain continuously when the sostenuto pedal is pressed.. Best for players with a light touch...
When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note(s). “GM&XG” and “GM2” groups may not be affected by use of the sostenuto pedal. The touch sensitivity type becomes the common setting for all Voices. the notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. Produces relatively high volume even with light playing strength. Standard touch response.
n • Some Voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the damper pedal is held.Setting the touch sensitivity of the keyboard You can adjust the touch response of the instrument (how the sound responds to the way you play the keys).. Requires moderately strong playing for high volume. • The touch sensitivity settings may have little or no effect with certain voices that are not normally responsive to keyboard dynamics. letting you sustain the sound of the voices even after releasing the keys. Best for players with a heavy touch. HARD 2 . • Certain Voices in the “PERCUSSION & DRUM KIT. SOFT 2.
n • Certain Voices.
1 2
Call up the operation display: [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [®] KEYBOARD/ PANEL → [A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH Press the [1π†]/[2π†] buttons to specify the touch response...
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using the Pedals
The Clavinova features three pedals..... the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. HARD 1 . All subsequent notes will not sustain. The settings assigned to this pedal may differ depending on the selected Voice. When Touch is set to OFF.
Quick Guide
n • This setting does not change the weight of the keyboard...
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
29
.. • Certain Voices in the “PERCUSSION & DRUM KIT”. SOFT 1. Produces high volume with moderate playing strength... set Touch to OFF for the corresponding parts by pressing the [5†]–[7†] buttons.
When you press the damper pedal here.. Requires strong playing to produce high volume.” “GM&XG” and “GM2” groups may not be affected by use of the damper pedal.
n The depth of the left pedal effect can be adjusted (page 95). NORMAL. • When you do not want to apply touch sensitivity..... the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain.. pressing this pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of the notes you play.
● Left Pedal When the Piano voice is selected.. such as [STRINGS] or [BRASS].
Left Pedal
Damper Pedal Sostenuto Pedal
● Damper Pedal (Right) The damper pedal performs the same function as the damper pedal on an actual acoustic piano.

■ Determine the Metronome Time Signature and Other Settings
1
Call up the operation display: [FUNCTION] → [I] UTILITY → TAB [√] CONFIG 1 → [B] 2 METRONOME
30
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. The higher the value. The range is between 5 and 500.
To stop the metronome.
Adjusting the Tempo or Setting the Time Signature of the Metronome Sound ■ Adjusting the Metronome Tempo
1
Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] button to call up the pop-up tempo setting display.
1 2
Press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button to start the metronome. press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button again. press the TEMPO [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously. Pressing and holding either button lets you continuously increase or decrease the value.
3
Press the [EXIT] button to close the Tempo display.
Using the Metronome Quick Guide
The metronome provides a click sound. To reset the tempo.
2
Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] buttons to set the tempo.
n About the Tempo display The number in the display indicates how many quarter-note beats there are in one minute.
Making Settings for the Pedals You can assign one of the various functions to the three pedals or an optional foot controller/footswitch. giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice. the faster the tempo. You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to adjust the value.● Foot Controller/Footswitch An optional Yamaha foot controller (FC7) or footswitch (FC4 or FC5) can be connected to the AUX PEDAL jack and used to control various functions assigned (page 186). doing things like starting and stopping the Style (page 186). or letting you hear and check how a speciﬁc tempo sounds.

see page 73.. Determines which sound is used for the metronome...
ORGAN FLUTES
3
Press the TAB [√] button to select the PRESET display..... For the Voice part.. Conventional metronome sound... with bell...... English Voice .... For details on the characteristics. Count in French Spanish Voice ....
VOLUME SOUND Determines the level of the metronome sound... Count in Japanese French Voice.
1
Press the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] button to turn the right-hand part on.... press the [PIANO] button to display various piano Voices.. For example.
ORGAN FLUTES
n About the various Voices Refer to the Voice List in the separate Data List booklet.. with no bell.
The Voice selected here is the RIGHT 1 Voice. Count in English German Voice .... see page 72...
2
Press one of the VOICE buttons to select a Voice category and call up the Voice selection display. Voice buttons on the panel correspond to the categories of the preset Voices... Count in Spanish Determines the time signature of the metronome sound......
Playing Preset Voices
The preset Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders.2
Set the parameters by pressing the [2π†]–[7π†] buttons. Conventional metronome sound.
Quick Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TIME SIGNATURE
Playing Various Voices
The Clavinova features a variety of Voices such as strings or wind instruments.. Bell On.. Count in German Japanese Voice .
n The Voice type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name... including exceptionally realistic piano Voices. Bell Off.....
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
31
.

you can play various drums and percussion instrument sounds on the keyboard. the sheer number of Voices may seem overwhelming at ﬁrst.
Recalling your favorite Voices easily The CVP has a huge amount of high-quality Voices. However. To stop the Demo. listen to the demo songs for each Voice. covering an exceptionally broad range of instrument sounds— making it perfect for virtually every musical application. press the [8†] (DEMO) button again. Refer to page 64 for details on the copy operation.
Playing the Voice Demos
To listen to the various Voices and hear how they sound especially in context.
n You can instantly jump back to the Main display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons. To check which “Standard Kit 1” percussion sounds are assigned to each key. Details are given in the Drum Kit List of the separate Data List. there are two methods: ● Save your favorite Voice to the USER display in the Voice Selection display and recall it by using the VOICE [USER] button
1 2
Copy your favorite Voices from the Preset drive to the User drive. press the [8†] (DEMO) button to start the Demo for the selected Voice. Press the Voice [USER] button to call up the Voice Selection display and press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Voice.
Selecting percussion sounds When one of the Drum Kit Voices in the [PERCUSSION & DRUM KIT] group is selected.
1 2
In the Voice Selection display (page 31 step 2).
Play the keyboard.
● Register your favorite Voice to Registration Memory and recall it with the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons Refer to page 125 for details on Registration Memory operations. To easily recall your favorite Voice.
32
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. look at the icons printed above the keys.3
A F B G C H
D
I
E
J
4
Quick Guide
4
4 5
Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Voice.
n Restoring the Piano settings Press the piano-shaped [PIANO] button.

Playing different Voices simultaneously The Clavinova can play different Voices simultaneously (page 73). you can set up the keyboard to play the bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right hand. Play the keyboard. Press the [2π] button to display page 2. • Setting separate Voices for the left and right sections of the keyboard You can play different Voices with the left and right hands.
Selecting GM/XG/GM2 Voices
You can select the GM/XG/GM2 Voices directly via the panel operation. • Layering two different Voices This is useful for creating rich and thick sounds.” Press the [2π] button to display page 2.
Quick Guide
Press the [F] button to select “SoundEffect. Press the [E]/[F] button to select “GM&XG”/“GM2. The sound effects are categorized as “GM&XG”/“GM2. For example. Press the [8π] (UP) button to call up the Voice categories. select the desired category.” Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired sound effect.”
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 1] button to call up the Voice selection display. then select the desired voice. Perform steps 1–4 described above.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
33
. such as bird chirps and ocean sounds from the keyboard.Selecting sound effects You can play individual sound effects.

but also many preset Songs.
The preset Songs are categorized and contained in appropriate folders.
Playing a Preset Song
1
Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display.
SONG SELECT
2
Press the TAB [√] button to select the PRESET tab. performance data is called a “Song. 4
Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Song.
3.
2
A F B G C H
D
I
E
J
3.
You can also select the ﬁle by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.”
Playing Back Songs Before Practicing
Clavinova includes not only the preset demo Songs. 4 3 4
Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song category.
34
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. You can also have the score (notation) of the selected Song shown in the display. This section covers basic information on playing back the preset Songs or Songs in a SmartMedia card. then press the [ENTER] button to execute.Practicing with the Preset Songs
SCORE KARAOKE SONG SELECT
Quick Guide
n Song On the Clavinova.
n You can instantly jump back to the Main display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons.

press the [H] button to select “OFF” in the display in step 2.
REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE
6
Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
35
.
4
Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Song. Carefully insert the card into the slot. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display.
1 2 3 4 5
Select a Song in the desired folder. [FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING Press the [H] (REPEAT MODE) button to select “ALL. in order. To turn off the Song sequence playback.” Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.
Quick Guide
REC
STOP
PLAY/ PAUSE
Playing a Song from SmartMedia card
CAUTION Make sure to read page 22 for information on how to handle SmartMedia cards and the card slot. Press the TAB [√][®] button to select the CARD tab.
Playing Songs in sequence You can play all Songs in a folder continuously. towards the card slot.5
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. All Songs in the folder play back continuously. slowly pushing it all the way in until it is ﬁtted in place. Call up the operation display.
1 2 3
Hold the SmartMedia card so that the connector section (gold) of the card is facing downward and forward.

which light as the Song plays back. The method for selecting a Song is the same as “Playing a preset Song (page 34)” or “Playing a Song from SmartMedia card (page 35). Specify the channel for practicing and increase the playback volume for the channel. Press the [E]/[J] button to select “VOLUME.
36
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
Quick Guide
3
2. Watching these as you listen can show you which channel you wish to boost.Boost the volume of the part to be practiced On the CVP.”
• Look at the channel indicators.
If you don’t know which channel’s volume to raise: • Look at the illustrations of the instruments indicated below “VOICE.
1 2
Select a Song. press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH9–16) display.” Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display. press the appropriate buttons [1π†]–[8π†]. 4
3 4 5 6
Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the VOL/VOICE tab. If the desired channel is not shown in the MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH1–8) display. Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button until “MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH1–8)” is shown at the top of the display.” π π To raise the level of the desired channel(s). a single Song can contain separate data for up to sixteen MIDI channels.

• The notation functions cannot be used to create Song data by inputting notes.” Press the [8π] (OK) button to apply the setting. lyrics.
n • The Clavinova can display the music notation of commercially-available music data or your recorded Songs.
Changing the Notation Display
You can change the notation display as desired to suit your personal preferences. indicating the current position. chords.
n Look through the entire score before playing back the Song Press the TAB [®] button to select subsequent pages. etc. For information on creating Song data.).Displaying Music Notation (Score)
You can view the music notation of the selected Song.
● Displaying only right-hand part/left-hand part notation Press the [1π†]/[2π†] button to disable display of
the left-hand part/right-hand part. Use the [1π†]–[4π†] buttons to turn off the items you want not to be displayed.
The “ball” bounces along through the score. C: red. D: yellow. We suggest that you read through the music notation before starting to practice. see page 137.
n About the note colors These colors are ﬁxed for each note and cannot be changed. As a result. Press the [8π†] (SET UP) button to call up the detailed setting display. Changing the following settings as desired. Press the [6†] (NOTE NAME) button to select “Fixed Do.
• Turn on the note colors Press the [6π†] button to turn the COLOR on.
Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback. F: orange. • The displayed notation is generated by the Clavinova based on the Song data. and B: gray
● Increase the number of measures in the display
You can increase the number of measures that will be displayed by decreasing the other items to be displayed (part. G: blue. A: purple.
Quick Guide
Press the [SCORE] button to display the music notation.
● Customizing the notation display
• Display the note name at the left of the note
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 2 3 4
Press the [5π†] (NOTE) button to display the note name. it may not be exactly the same as commercially available sheet music of the same song—especially when displaying notation of complicated passages or many short notes.
● Changing the size of the music notation Press the [7π†] button to change the size of the
music notation.
1 2
Press the [SCORE] button to display the music notation.
1 2
Select a Song (page 34). E: green.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
37
.
3 4
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

C Note names are indicated as letters (C. 1–16 Assigns the speciﬁed MIDI channel (1–16) to each of the left. and how long you should hold them down. when you should play them.
Practicing the Right-hand Part (TRACK 1) Using the Guide Lamps
1 2
Select a Song (page 34). This setting returns to AUTO when a different Song is selected. Make sure to select the smallest note value used in the song.
Quick Guide
Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is used for the left-hand/right-hand part. B). A. The root note is indicated as Do. AUTO The MIDI channels in the Song data for the right. D.
One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps
The key guide lamps indicate the notes you should play.or left-hand part and try practicing the part using the guide lamps. FIXED DO Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language. E.and left-hand parts are assigned automatically— setting the parts to the same channel as the channel which is speciﬁed in the [FUNCTION] → LEFT CH/RIGHT CH [B] SONG SETTING.
n Save the notation view settings The notation view settings can be saved as part of a Song (page 156).” As with “Fixed Do. B. For example.
1 2
Press the [8π†] (SETUP) button to call up the detailed setting display. A. The language is speciﬁed in LANGUAGE of the HELP display (page 57). Press the [1π†]–[6π†] buttons to set the view type. in the key of G major the root note of “So” would be indicated as “Do. and as such are relative to the key. This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation. at the stopped position. You can also practice at your own pace—since the accompaniment waits for you to play the notes correctly. OFF (LEFT CH only) No channel assignment: This disables display of the left-hand key range. MOVABLE DO Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals. letting you shift or correct the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value.Set the detailed parameters of the view type as desired. This menu is useful when the selected Song contains no key signature settings for displaying notation. mute the right. KEY SIGNATURE This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song. F.” the indication differs depending on the selected language. Selects the type of the note name indicated at the left of the note in the notation from among the following three types.
Turn the [GUIDE] button on.and right-hand parts. The settings here are available when the NOTE parameter in “Display the note name at the left of the note” step 1 is set to ON. Here.
SONG SELECT
2
REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE
SCORE
KARAOKE
3 4
38
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
QUANTIZE
NOTE NAME
3
Press the [8π] (OK) button to apply the setting. G.

Left) See page 73. For Karaoke • Karao-Key This automatically controls the timing of Song playback to match your singing—a convenient feature for singing along with your keyboard performance. For keyboard performance • Any Key This lets you practice the timing of playing the keys. Right 2.3 4
Press the [TRACK 1 (R)] button to mute the right-hand part.
n Adjusting the tempo 1 Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] button to call up the Tempo display.
The indicator of the [TRACK 1 (R)] button goes out.
Turn the [GUIDE] button off. You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to adjust the value.
Quick Guide
5 6
Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback. 2 Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] button to change the tempo.
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.
2
Other guide functions The initial setting “Follow Lights” was used in the instructions “One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps” above. see page 135. To select a guide function. Quickly changing tempo during a performance (Tap function) The tempo can also be changed during Song playback by tapping the [TAP] button twice at the desired tempo. There are additional functions in the Guide feature. You can now play that part by yourself.
n About Karaoke See page 52. To adjust the Song volume. Pressing and holding either button continuously increases or decreases the value.
Practice the muted part using the guide lamps. select NEXT (page 136).
Adjusting the volume balance between the Song and the keyboard This lets you adjust the volume balance between Song playback and the sound you play on the keyboard.
1 2 3
Press the [BALANCE] button to call up the volume balance display. To adjust the keyboard (RIGHT 1) volume.
1 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
2
n About keyboard parts (Right 1. press the [6π†] button. Press the [EXIT] button to close the volume balance display. as described below. press the [1π†] button. Have the guide lamp ﬂash a lead-in to the music In the GUIDE LAMP TIMING. CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
39
. • Vocal CueTIME This automatically controls the timing of the accompaniment to match the melody (pitch) of your singing—allowing you to practice singing with the correct pitch.

Playing Back a Song Repeatedly
1 2 3 4
Select a Song (page 34).Practicing the Left-hand Part (TRACK 2) Using the Guide Lamps
1.
Turn the [GUIDE] button off.
Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function
The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a Song or a speciﬁc range of measures in a Song. The Song will be played back repeatedly until you press the SONG [STOP] button. Specify the repeat range. pressing the [STOP] button returns to Point A.
4 5
Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback. Press the [REPEAT] button again at the ending point (B). Press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat playback. After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase). Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. You can now play that part by yourself. the range from Point A to Point B is played back repeatedly. Press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat playback.
The indicator of the [TRACK 2 (L)] button goes out. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.
Quick Guide
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback and practice the muted part using the guide lamps.
Specifying a Range of Measures and Playing them Back Repeatedly (A-B Repeat)
1 2 3
Select a Song (page 34). Press the [REPEAT] button to turn on Repeat playback.
40
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Press the [REPEAT] button at the starting point (A) of the range to be repeated. This is useful for repeated practicing of difﬁcult-to-play phrases.
Press the [TRACK 2] button to mute the left-hand part.
n Instantly returning to Point A Regardless of whether the Song is playing back or is stopped.
Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.2 3 4 5 6
Follow the same steps as in “Practice the Right-hand Part (TRACK 1) Using the Guide Lamps” on page 38.

To close the message.
● Specifying the repeat range between Point A and the end of the Song Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song.
Quick Guide
Recording Your Performance
Record your performance by using the Quick Recording feature. if you have your teacher or partner record his or her part beforehand. You can also use it to practice duet pieces by yourself. The selected Voice will be recorded.
REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE
4 5
Start recording. Press the [FF] button to advance to the Point B location.
A blank Song for recording is automatically set. This is an effective practice tool.
REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE
2 3
Select a Voice (page 31).
REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
41
.
Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop recording. Press the [REPEAT] button again to specify Point B.
Press the [REC] button.
Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. Press the [REPEAT] button to specify Point A. press the [EXIT] button.Other Methods for Specifying the A–B Repeat Range
● Specifying the repeat range while Songs are stopped
1 2 3 4
Press the [FF] button to advance to the Point A location.
A message prompting you to save the recorded performance appears.
1
Press the [REC] and [STOP] buttons simultaneously. allowing you to easily compare your own performance to the original song you are practicing.

Save?/“Song” speichern?/“Song” modiﬁé.
REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE
7
Quick Guide
1 2 3 4 5
Save the recorded performance.?/“Song” cambiado. press the [G] (YES) button to open the Song selection display and save the data (see above). the current chord name will be displayed in the Main display during Song playback. To save the data. Select USER to save the data to internal memory.
Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display. Enter the ﬁle name (page 67). To cancel the operation.
When the following message appears: “Song” changed.
1
Select a Song (page 34). press the [H] (NO) button. we recommend that you use the Songs in the “Sing-a-long” folder. Press the [8π] (OK) button to save the ﬁle. the Song must contain chord data. Sauv.
In these example instructions. Press the TAB [√]/[®] buttons to select the appropriate tab (USER. press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Press the [6†] (SAVE) button to call up the ﬁle naming display.
n Before using performance assistant technology To use the performance assistant technology. letting you easily check whether the Song contains chord data or not.
CAUTION The recorded song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation.6
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded performance. CARD. etc.
42
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
Playing Backing Parts with the performance assistant Technology
This feature makes it exceptionally easy to play the backing parts along with Song playback.) to which you want to save the data. or select CARD to save the data to a SmartMedia card. To cancel the Save operation. ¿Guardar?/Salvare “’Song” ? The recorded data has not yet been saved. If the Song contains this data.

2
Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn the feature on.
Play three notes at the same time with your right hand. (method 2).
SCORE KARAOKE SONG SELECT
3
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Try playing in the three different ways below. no matter what keys you play.
● Playing the left and right hand together ● Playing the left and right hand together ● Playing the left hand and right hand (method 1).
REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE
Quick Guide
4
Play the keyboard.
Play three notes at the same time with your right hand. alternately.
The instrument automatically matches your performance on the keyboard to the Song playback and chords.
5 6
Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.
Play several notes one after the other with different ﬁngers of your right hand.
Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button again to turn the feature off. It even changes the sound according to the way you play.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
43
.

The Styles of the instrument cover a wide range of different musical genres including pop. and many others.
Quick Guide
STYLE SELECT
Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto Accompaniment Feature
MARY HAD A LITTLE LAMB
Traditional Style: Country Pop
C
3
2
1
2
C
3
G
2
C
3
5
1
1
4
1
C
3
2 1
2
C
3
G
2
3
2
C
1
Ending
1
1
4
1
44
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. The Auto Accompaniment sound is made up of the rhythm patterns of the Styles. jazz. This lets you automatically recreate the sound of a full band or orchestra— even if you’re playing by yourself.Playing Accompaniment with the Auto Accompaniment Feature (Style Playback)
The Auto Accompaniment features let you produce automatic accompaniment playback simply by playing “chords” with your left hand.

n The Style type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style name. the Auto Accompaniment starts.
2
A F
STYLE SELECT
B
G
C
H
D
I
Quick Guide
1
E
J
3.
n Chord Fingerings There are seven different ﬁngering methods you can use to specify chords (page 101). 4
3. For details on the characteristics.”
Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Style “CountryPop.
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand.1
Press the [STYLE SELECT] button to call up the Style selection display. 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
Press the TAB [√] button to select the PRESET tab.
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on Auto Accompaniment.”
n You can instantly jump back to the Main display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons.
Use the left-hand section (lower part) of the keyboard to play the chords for sounding the Auto Accompaniment.
3 4 5
Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the Style category “Country.
5 6 7
6
7
8
Press the [SYNC START] button to set Auto Accompaniment to standby—letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you start playing. see page 101.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
45
.
Try playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand.

as well as variations in the rhythm/ chord patterns. • Quickly changing the Style tempo during a performance (Tap function) The tempo can also be changed during playback by tapping the [TAP] button twice at the desired tempo.
1 2 3
Press the [BALANCE] button to call up the volume balance display. [FUNCTION] → [I] UTILITY →TAB[√] CONFIG 1 → [B] 4 TAP
46
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
n The particular drum sound and the velocity (loudness) of the sound when the Tap function is used can be selected in the following display. Press one of the INTRO [I]–[III] buttons before starting Style playback and press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to start Style playback. There are several different auto accompaniment pattern variations for each situation: starting your performance. press the [6π†] button. ● Synchro Start This lets you start playback as soon as you play the keyboard. and ending your performance. Press the [EXIT] button to close the volume balance display.
Pattern Variation
While you play. Simply tap (press/release) the [TAP] button (four times for a 4/4 time signature). professional-sounding performances.”
When Ending playback is ﬁnished.
n • About the various Styles Refer to the Style List in the separate Data List booklet. To adjust the Style volume. Each preset Style features three different intros. press the [2π†] button. ● Tap Tap out the tempo and automatically start the Style at that tapped speed. • Specifying the split point (the border between the right.
To Start Playing
STYLE SELECT
● Start/Stop Styles start playing back as soon as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button is pressed.
Quick Guide
Adjusting the volume balance between the Style and the keyboard This lets you adjust the volume balance between Style playback and the sound you play on the keyboard.8
Automatically play an appropriate ending by pressing the [ENDING] button. for more dynamic. • Turns touch response on/off for the Style playback (Style Touch) See page 105. at the point in the score indicated by “Ending. To adjust the keyboard (RIGHT 1) volume. ● Intro This is used for the beginning of the song. Press the [SYNC START] button when Style playback is stopped and play a chord in the chord section of the keyboard to start Style playback. the Style automatically stops. you can automatically add specially created intros and endings. and the Style playback starts automatically at the tempo you tapped.and left-hand range) See page 104. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button when Style playback is stopped and press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to start Style playback. ● Fade In The Fade In produces smooth fade-ins when starting the Style. accompaniment shifts to the Main section (see “Main” in the “During Style playback” below). Try out the variations and combine them freely. When the intro ﬁnished playing. during your performance.

[I]–[III] buttons during Style playback. Press the [BREAK] button during Style playback.
Quick Guide
To Finish Playing
STYLE SELECT
● Start/stop Styles stop as soon as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button is pressed. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button during Style playback. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures. D) buttons as you play. and the selected ﬁll-in section plays automatically (AUTO FILL). see page 103. Turn on the [AUTO FILL IN] button before starting Style playback or during playback. C. the Style stops automatically. Then. to make your performance sound even more professional. simply press one of the MAIN VARIATION (A.
n • Enable Synchro Stop by pressing/releasing keys (Synchro Stop Window) See page 105. it leads smoothly into the selected main section (A. D). C.
n Pressing the [ENDING I] button during playback of the Main section automatically plays a ﬁll-in before playing back the Ending.
n For details on setting the fade-in and fade-out time.
● Fade Out The Fade Out produces smooth fade-outs when stopping the Style. Press the [SYNC STOP] button before starting the Style playback.During Style Playback
STYLE SELECT
● Main This is used for playing the main part of the Song. pressing the same button of the currently playing section automatically plays a ﬁll-in before returning to the same main section. B. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the same ENDING/rit. ● Ending This is used for the ending of the Song. spicing up the auto accompaniment. When the ﬁll-in is ﬁnished.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
47
. When the ending is ﬁnished. Press one of the ENDING/rit. Even when [AUTO FILL IN] button is turned off. B. Each preset Style features three different endings. Press one of the MAIN [A]–[D] buttons during Style playback.
Others
STYLE SELECT
● Synchro Stop When Synchro Stop is on. This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your performance. and repeats indeﬁnitely. you can stop and start the Style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in the chord section of the keyboard). button again while the ending is playing back. to make your performance sound even more professional. Each preset Style features four different patterns. ● Break This lets you add dynamic breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment. ● Fill In The ﬁll-in sections let you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment.

) lamps
• Green The section is not selected. This function adds a natural richness to the overall accompaniment sound.
The notes you need to play to make the selected chord are shown in the display. etc.
1 2
Call up the operation display.
1 2
Press the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the left-hand part on.
n The notes that are displayed correspond to Fingered. Non-decaying voices such as strings are held continuously.• Fixing the section pattern to either Intro or Main (Section Set) For example.
Quick Guide
Holding the LEFT part Voice (Left Hold) This function causes the LEFT part Voice to be held even when the keys are released. • Off The section contains no data and cannot be played. no matter which ﬁngering type is selected (page 102).
[FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB[√][®] CHORD FINGERING
Press the [6π†] button to select the root note.
2 3
3
Press the [7π†]/[8π†] button to select the chord type. you can have the instrument show you the notes to play (Chord Tutor function). while decay-type voices such as piano decay more slowly (as if the sustain pedal has been pressed).
2
1
Learning How to Play (Indicate) Chords for Style Playback
Learning the Notes to Play for Certain Chords
If know the name of a chord but don’t know how to play it. • Red The section is currently selected.
48
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Press the [LEFT HOLD] button to turn the Left Hold function on. you can set this function to Intro to conveniently have an Intro play automatically whenever you select a Style (page 105).
About the section button (INTRO/MAIN/ENDING.

etc.
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.
n Parameter Lock You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.
Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] buttons.
The Guide lamps in the chord section of the keyboard ﬂash according to the chords of the Song.
Press the [GUIDE] button. effect. so that you can immediately start playing the Style. effects.) that match the current Style—it also automatically turns on ACMP and SYNC START.
3
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand.
Press the [FUNCTION] button and press the [B] button to call up the Song Setting display.Checking How to Play Chords with the Guide Lamps
For Songs containing chord data. Try practicing the chords.g.) for the currently selected Style. you can have the individual notes of the chords indicated with the Guide lamps on the instrument.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 126). the selected Style starts.
Not only does this instantly call up all the settings (Voices.. matching the Guide lamps. etc.
Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style (One Touch Setting)
One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings (Voices or effects. etc.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
49
. and make sure that the GUIDE MODE is set to “Follow Lights.
1 2
Select a Style (page 45). If you’ve already decided which Style you wish to use.
1 2 3 4 5
Select a Song (page 34). you can have One Touch Setting automatically select the appropriate Voice for you.”
Quick Guide
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on Auto Accompaniment. split point. with the touch of a single button.

1
Quick Guide
Set up the panel controls (such as Voice.
n The data (records) of the Music Finder are not the same as Song data and cannot be played back. Press the [F] (YES) button to call up the Style selection display and save the panel settings as a Style ﬁle (page 63).
1
Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display.
2 3 4
2
3
Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song—Music Finder
If you want to play in a certain genre of music but don’t know which Style and Voice settings would be appropriate. A new record can be created by editing the currently selected one (page 108).
50
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] buttons.
● Memorizing the panel settings to the OTS You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups.
CAUTION The panel settings memorized to each OTS button will be lost if you change the Style or turn the power off without executing the Save operation. the convenient Music Finder function can help you out. and so on) as desired. Press the [MEMORY] button. Simply select the desired music genre from among the Music Finder “Records. A message appears in the display prompting you to save the panel settings. effects. Style.To use the OTS Link function. press the [OTS LINK] button.Helpful hints for using One Touch Setting ● Automatically changing One Touch Settings with the Main sections (OTS Link) The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when you select a different Main section (A–D).” and the CVP automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style.
n Setting the timing for OTS changes The One Touch Settings can be set to change with the sections in one of two different timings (page 105).

.... then press the [ENTER] button to execute. The record is sorted by song title.... Simultaneously press the [π†] buttons to move the cursor to the ﬁrst record. • STYLE... split point. press the [2π†]/[3π†] buttons...
n • Tempo Lock Tempo Lock function lets you avoid changing the Tempo during Style playback when selecting another record..
Sorting the records Press the [F] (SORT BY) button to sort the records........
Notice that the panel settings have been automatically changed to match the music genre of the selected record.... Simultaneously press the [π†] buttons to move the cursor to the ﬁrst record.
• BEAT .... letting you easily ﬁnd the desired music style. • MUSIC . • TEMPO ........Contains the song title or music genre that describes each record.... The record is sorted by Style name....
• MUSIC .........
n • You can also select the desired record by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 126).....This is the time signature registered to each Record........ To turn on the Tempo Lock function........... Changing the order of the records Press the [G] (SORT ORDER) button to change the order of the records (ascending or descending)...
n Skipping up or down through the Style alphabetically When sorting records by Style name.... To select a record...... • Searching the records The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword—and instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria (page 106)..This is the preset Style assigned to the record.. press the [6π†]/[7π†] (TEMPO LOCK) button in the Music Finder display... etc..........
Select the desired record by using the following four search categories. • BEAT ...g......
n Skipping up or down through the song alphabetically When sorting records by song title... • TEMPO ..... effect.
4
Play the keyboard.... use the [1π†] button to skip up or down through the songs alphabetically...2
1
Quick Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3 2 3
Press the TAB [√] button to select the ALL tab..
The ALL tab contains the preset records.. This is the assigned tempo setting for the record... • Parameter Lock You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.... The record is sorted by beat. The record is sorted by tempo.....
• STYLE.... use the [4π†]/[5π†] button to skip up or down through the Styles alphabetically.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
51
............

Adjust the controls while checking the SIGNAL and OVER lamps. Set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob on the bottom panel of the instrument to the minimum position.
INPUT VOLUME
MIN MAX
MIC. Connect the microphone to the [MIC. letting you play and sing while following along with the notation and lyrics. turn on the power ﬁrst. Make sure to adjust the INPUT VOLUME so that this lamp is light.
SCORE
KARAOKE
Quick Guide
Connecting a Microphone
1 2 3
Make sure you have a conventional dynamic microphone./LINE IN] jack.
n Always set the INPUT VOLUME to minimum when nothing is connected to the [MIC/LINE IN] jack./LINE IN] jack. Lyrics can also be displayed with the music score. LINE
PHONES
2.Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke) or Your Own Performance
Connect a microphone to the CVP and sing along with Song playback (Karaoke) or your own performance.
n Set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob to the minimum position before turning off the power. it may pick up and produce noise when nothing is connected.
2
Disconnect the microphone from the [MIC. The OVER lamp lights when the input level is too high.”
(For microphones having a power source. 5 34 4 5
Set the [MIC. Make sure to adjust the INPUT VOLUME so that this lamp does not light. The lyrics can be displayed when the Song contains lyric data. The SIGNAL lamp lights to indicate that an audio signal is being received. Sing with the microphone as you read the lyrics shown in the display. Disconnecting the microphone 1 Set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob on the bottom panel of the instrument to the minimum position. LINE IN
MIC. LINE] switch to “MIC. Since the [MIC/LINE IN] jack is highly sensitive.
52
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.) Adjust the [INPUT VOLUME] knob while singing into the microphone.

Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.. The lyrics background picture can be saved to the Song (page 156)... if necessary.. The color of the lyrics changes as the Song plays.... [FUNCTION] → [G] VIDEO OUT Press the [1π†] button to select the external television/video monitor signal.. if the lyrics shown are garbled or unreadable.
1 2
L L+R
R
Call up the operation display..
VIDEO OUT
AUX IN
n • When the lyrics are unreadable You may need to change the Lyrics Language setting to “International” or “Japanese” in the Song Setting display ([FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING).
Press the [KARAOKE] button to display the lyrics. • Changing the lyrics You can change the lyrics as desired (page 160).
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
53
......... • Transposing the Song key down ..
Displaying the lyrics on an external TV monitor The lyrics indicated on the display can also be output via the VIDEO OUT terminal.. Press the TRANSPOSE [–] button.. • Changing the Lyrics Background Picture You can change the background picture of the Lyrics display..
1 2
Use an appropriate video cable to connect the [VIDEO OUT] connector of the CVP to the Video input connector on the TV monitor...Singing with the Lyrics Display
Try singing while playing back a Song containing lyric data
1 2 3 4
Select a Song (page 34).. This setting can be memorized as part of the Song data (page 156).....
Convenient Functions for Karaoke
Adjusting the tempo Transpose Applying Effects to Your Voice Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice Practicing Singing with Proper Pitch (Vocal CueTIME) ➤ ➤ ➤ ➤ ➤ page 30 See below.
Sing while following along with the lyrics on the display.. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display...
Quick Guide
Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback...... Press the TRANSPOSE [+][–] buttons simultaneously.. Press the [7π†]/[8π†] (BACKGROUND) button in the Lyrics display to call up the Lyrics picture selection display for the available picture ﬁles and select the desired one.. page 54 page 54 page 135
Transpose
You can use this to adjust the key of the Song if it is too high or low.... Press the TRANSPOSE [+] button... • Resetting the transposition . • Transposing the Song key up. Set the external television/video monitor signal (NTSC or PAL) used by your video equipment.

If the Song contains this data. the current chord name will be displayed in the Main display during Song playback.
54
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
2
Press the [4π†]/[5π†] buttons to turn the effect on.
A
F
B
G
C
H
4
D
I
2
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3 3
Press the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons to turn the harmony vocals (Vocal Harmony) on.
Applying Effects to Your Voice
You can also apply various effects to your voice.
Quick Guide
1
Press the [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] button to call up the Mic Setting display. press the [EXIT] button.To close the Transpose display.
2
Press the [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] button to call up the harmony vocals (Vocal Harmony) Setting display. letting you easily check whether the Song contains chord data or not.
Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice
You can also automatically apply various harmony vocals to your voice.
1
Select a Song which contains chord data (page 34).
n Selecting an effect type You can select the effect type in the Mixing Console (page 86).

” This brings the keyboard part up and the song data down to your desired singing key.
For details on the Vocal Harmony types. To adjust the Song volume.
A
F
B
G
C
H
Quick Guide
D
I
E
J
6 7
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on Auto Accompaniment.
[FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [®] KEYBOARD/PANEL → [B] TRANSPOSE ASSIGN
Press the [4π†]/[5π†] button to select the desired transpose type.
1 2
Call up the operation display. the Song data is in F.” the Keyboard Transpose to “2.4 5
Press the [H] button to call up the Vocal Harmony selection display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Vocal Harmony type.
Adjusting the microphone and Song volume You can adjust the volume balance between the Song playback and the microphone. Select the one most suited to your purpose. Press the [EXIT] button to close the volume balance display.
The harmony is applied to your voice according to the chord data. To match up the keys. press the [4π†] button.” and the Song Transpose to “-3. and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. but you feel most comfortable singing in D.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
55
.
The following types are available. set the Master Transpose to “0. press the [1π†] button. To adjust the microphone volume. page 56 page 56 page 135
Changing the Key (Transpose)
You can match both the Song and your keyboard performance to a certain key.
1 2 3
Press the [BALANCE] button to call up the Volume Balance display. refer to the separate Data List.
Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Own Performance
Changing the Key (Transpose) Displaying the Music Score on the Instrument and the Lyrics on TV Making Announcements Between Songs Controlling Playback Timing by Your Voice (Karao-Key) ➤ ➤ ➤ ➤ See below. For example.
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button and sing into the microphone.

1 2
Call up the operation display.●KEYBOARD Transpose pitch of the keyboard played Voices and Style playback (controlled by what you play in the chord section of the keyboard).
[FUNCTION] → [G] VIDEO OUT
Press the [3π]/[4π] button to select LYRICS. press the [+][–] buttons simultaneously. press the [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] button to call up the MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY display. CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Whenever the TALK function is turned on.
3
Quick Guide
Press the TRANSPOSE [–]/[+] button to transpose. several effects are usually assigned to the MIC Setup. ●MASTER Transpose the overall pitch of the CVP.
1
Before your performance.
You can set the value in semitone steps.
Displaying the Music Score on the Instrument and the Lyrics on TV
This convenient sing-along function lets you have the music score shown on the display of the instrument (for your playing purposes). allowing you to add any desired effects to your voice as you speak to your audience (page 168). ●SONG Transposes the pitch of Song playback. To reset the transpose value.
4
Press the [EXIT] button to close the TRANSPOSE display. effects are automatically turned off. while only the lyrics are shown on a separate TV monitor (page 53) so your audience can sing along. When singing a song.
n Talk settings can be customized as well. When speaking to your audience.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 2
56
Press the [2π]/[3π] (TALK) button to turn the function on.
Making Announcements Between Songs
This function is ideal for making announcements between your singing performances. however. these effects may sound disturbing or unnatural.

” “P2. When the message appears. simply press the appropriate button. following the directions shown in the Help display. Press the [8π†] button to conﬁrm your selection.
1
Press the [HELP] button to call up the Help display.
The language selected here is also used for various “Messages” shown during operations.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
57
.” etc.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
In this example. press the [F] (YES) button to start formatting the SmartMedia card. Try them out.
Selecting message language You can select the desired language of the display messages in the Help display (see above).
The Messages Shown in the Display
A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. tabs appear. use the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons to select the language. Use the TAB [√][®] buttons to select different pages if the there are additional pages (The “P1.Basic Operation
Trying Out the Basic Features (Help)
The Help function introduces some of the basic features of the instrument.) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.
Basic Operation
1 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
3
2
4
2 3 4 5
If necessary. Select one of the features you want to try by using the [1π†]– [5π†] buttons. A display explaining the selected feature appears.

1 2
Basic Operation
Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button. you can instantly call up the desired display—with just a single additional button press.Instant Selection of the Displays—Direct Access
Instant Selection of the Displays— Direct Access
With the convenient Direct Access function. A message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button. Example of calling up the Guide function display Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button. Press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that display. Refer to the separate Data List for a list of the displays that can be called up with the Direct Access function.
58
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
1
2
Returning to the Main display Here’s a convenient way to return to the Main display from any other display: Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button. then press the [GUIDE] button. then the [EXIT] button.

7 8 9 ) Returning to the Main display Here’s a convenient way to return to the Main display from any other display: Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button. Adjust the volume balance among the parts by using the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons.
Main Display
The Main display shows the current basic settings of the instrument such as the currently selected Voice and Style.
Basic Operation
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 Voice name • RIGHT 1 (indicated at the right edge of the display): Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 1 part (page 73). 6 Volume Balance Displays the volume balance among the parts. time signature and tempo. 9 BAR (current position of the Song or Style) Displays the current position of the Song or bar and beat number from playback start of the Style. • LEFT (indicated at the right edge of the display): Voice name currently selected for the LEFT part (page 73). 5 Registration Memory Bank name Displays the currently selected Registration Memory Bank name. Pressing the [J] button calls up the Registration Memory Bank Selection display (page 126). the chord speciﬁed in the chord section of the keyboard will be displayed. 7 Transpose Displays the amount of transposition in semitone units (page 53). time signature and tempo. 8 Tempo Displays the current tempo of the Song or Style.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
59
. the current chord name will be displayed in the “CHORD” segment (see 3 below). 2 Song name and related information Displays the currently selected Song name. Pressing the [C] button calls up the Song Selection display (page 34). If the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is set to On. ) Registration Sequence Appears when the Registration Sequence is active (page 128). current chord name Displays the currently selected Style name. 3 Style name and related information. Pressing the [D] button calls up the Style Selection display (page 45). If the Song contains the chord data. [B] and [F]–[I] buttons calls up the Voice Selection display for each part (page 31). allowing you to see them at a single glance.Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)
Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)
There are two basic display types – Main and Selection. • RIGHT 2 (indicated at the right edge of the display): Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 2 part (page 73). 4 Internet function Pressing the [E] button calls up the Internet Direct Connection display (page 170). The Main display is the one you’ll usually see when you play the keyboard. then the [EXIT] button. Here are explanations of each display segment and its basic operation. Pressing one of the [A].

Each folder shown in this display contains appropriately categorized Voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.
This display shows the Voice ﬁles in a folder. press the [8π] (UP) button. then press the [ENTER] button to execute. Example of the PRESET Voice Selection display The PRESET Voice ﬁles are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. There are two ways to do so.Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)
File Selection Display Basic Operation
1
A F B G C H
3
D
I
E
J
3 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3
8
4
Basic Operation
1 2 3 4
Select the tab containing the desired ﬁle by using the TAB [√]/[®] buttons. Closing the current folder and calling up the next highest level folder To close the current folder and call up the next highest level folder. • Select the ﬁle by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. Select the ﬁle. Select the page containing the desired ﬁle by using the [1π]–[7π] buttons ([1π]–[6π] buttons for Voice and Song). • Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons.
8
The next highest level—in this case. folder—is shown.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
61
.

.................. you will need to format the card for the instrument... page 64 • Moving Files (Cut & Paste)........................................................................ page 63 • Copying Files/Folders (Copy & Paste).....” 4 Press the [H] button to format the card......
CAUTION • Formatting a SmartMedia card completely erases all data on the card.......... • The SmartMedia cards formatted with this instrument may become unusable with other instruments..................................
Basic Operation
Formatting a SmartMedia card A new SmartMedia card or one which has been used with other devices may not be immediately usable with the CVP............. page 67
Formatting a ﬂoppy disk To format a ﬂoppy disk......... page 66 • Creating a New Folder .............................
A
F
3
B
G
C
H
4
D
I
E
J
62
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.......................... page 65 • Deleting Files/Folders ........Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)
File/Folder Operations in the File Selection Display
• Saving Files ........................ select “USB” in step3 at right........................................................................................................... Make sure that the SmartMedia card you’re formatting does not contain important data! • Make sure to read page 22 for how to handle the SmartMedia card and card slot............................................................
1 Insert a SmartMedia card for formatting into the card slot................. page 66 • Selecting Custom Icons for Files (shown at the left of ﬁle name) .................. CAUTION Make sure to read page 21 for how to handle the ﬂoppy disk drive and ﬂoppy disk..... If the SmartMedia card inserted in the instrument’s card slot cannot be accessed by the instrument..... page 67 • Entering characters................ 2 Call up the operation display............................ [FUNCTION] → [I]UTILITY → TAB[√]/[®]MEDIA 3 Press the [A] button to select “CARD..... page 65 • Renaming Files/Folders.........................................

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

Saving Files
This operation lets you save your original data (such as Songs and Voices you’ve created) to a ﬁle.

1

After you’ve created a Song or Voice in the relevant SONG CREATOR or SOUND CREATOR display, press the [SAVE] display button. The File Selection display for the corresponding data appears. Keep in mind that the Save operation is executed from the File Selection display.

Internal memory (User tab displays) capacity The internal memory capacity of the instrument is about 3.3MB. This capacity applies to all ﬁle types, including Voice, Style, Song, and Registration data ﬁles.

Basic Operation

I

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2 3

Select the appropriate tab (USER, CARD, etc.) to which you want to save the data by using the TAB [√]/[®] buttons. Press the [6†] (SAVE) button to call up the ﬁle naming display.

4 5

Enter the ﬁle name (page 67). Press the [8π] (OK) button to save the ﬁle. If you want to cancel the Save operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. The saved ﬁle will be automatically located at the appropriate position among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

63

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

Restrictions for protected Songs Commercially available song data may be copy protected to prevent illegal copying or accidental erasure. They are marked by the indications at the upper left side of the ﬁle names. The indications and relevant restrictions are detailed below.
Prot. 1 Indicates Preset Songs saved to the User tab display, Disk Orchestra Collection (DOC) Songs, and Disklavier Piano Soft Songs. These cannot be copied/moved/saved to external devices such as SmartMedia cards and hard disk. Indicates Yamaha-protection-formatted Songs. These cannot be copied. These can be moved/saved only to the USER tab display and SmartMedia cards with ID. Indicates edited “Prot. 2 Orig” Songs. Make sure to save these to the same folder containing the corresponding “Prot. 2 Orig” Song. These cannot be copied. These can be moved/saved only to the USER tab display and SmartMedia cards with ID.

Prot. 2 Orig

Basic Operation

Prot. 2 Edit

Note for “Prot. 2 Orig” and “Prot. 2 Edit” Song ﬁle operation Make sure to save the “Prot. 2 Edit” Song to the same folder containing its original “Prot. 2 Orig” Song. Otherwise the “Prot. 2 Edit” Song cannot be played back. Also, if you move a “Prot. 2 Edit” Song, be sure to move its original “Prot. 2 Orig” Song to the same location (folder) at the same time.

Copying Files/Folders (Copy & Paste)
This operation lets you copy a ﬁle/folder and paste it to another location (folder).

1 2

Call up the display containing the ﬁle/folder you want to copy. Press the [3†] (COPY) button to copy the ﬁle/folder. The pop-up window for the Copy operation appears at the bottom of the display.

3

Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle/ folder. To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again. ■ Selecting all ﬁles/folders Press the [6†] (ALL) button to select all ﬁles/folders indicated on the current display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6†] (ALL OFF) button again.

4 5 6

Press the [7†] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle/folder selection. To cancel the Copy operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Select the destination tab (USER, CARD, etc.) to paste the ﬁle/folder, by using the TAB [√]/[®] buttons. Press the [4†] (PASTE) button to paste the ﬁle/folder. The folder/ﬁle copied and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate position among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

64

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

Moving Files (Cut & Paste)
This operation lets you cut a ﬁle and paste it to another location (folder).

1 2

Call up the display containing the ﬁle you want to move. Press the [2†] (CUT) button to cut the ﬁle. The pop-up window for the Cut operation appears at the bottom of the display.

3

Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle. To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again.
Basic Operation

■ Selecting all ﬁles Press the [6†] (ALL) button to select all ﬁles indicated on the current display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6†] (ALL OFF) button again.

4 5 6

Press the [7†] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle selection. To cancel the Cut operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Select the destination tab (USER, CARD, etc.) to which the ﬁle is to be pasted, by using the TAB [√]/[®] buttons. Press the [4†] (PASTE) button to paste the ﬁle. The ﬁle moved and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate position among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

Deleting Files/Folders
This operation lets you delete a ﬁle/folder.

1 2

Call up the display containing the ﬁle/folder you want to delete. Press the [5†] (DELETE) button. The pop-up window for the Delete operation appears at the bottom of the display.

3

Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle/ folder. To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again. ■ Selecting all ﬁles/folders Press the [6†] (ALL) button to select all ﬁles/folders indicated on the current display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6†] (ALL OFF) button again.

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

65

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

4 5
Deleting all data in a SmartMedia card at once Formatting a SmartMedia card completely erases all data on the SmartMedia card (page 62).

Press the [7†] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle/folder selection. To cancel the Delete operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Follow the on-display instructions. YES ........................Delete the ﬁle/folder YES ALL .................Delete all selected ﬁles/folders NO ........................Leave the ﬁle/folder as is without deleting CANCEL.................Cancel the Delete operation

Call up the display containing the ﬁle/folder you want to rename. Press the [1†] (NAME) button. The pop-up window for the Rename operation appears at the bottom of the display.

3 4 5

Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle/ folder. Press the [7†] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle/folder selection. To cancel the Rename operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Input the name (characters) of the selected ﬁle or folder (page 68). The renamed folder/ﬁle appears on the display at the appropriate position among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

Selecting Custom Icons for Files (Shown at the Left of File Name)
You can select custom icons for ﬁles (shown at the left of ﬁle name).

1–4 5 6

Operations are the same as the above “Renaming Files/Folders” section.

Press the [1†] (ICON) button to call up the ICON display. Select the icon by using the [A]–[J] buttons or [3π†]–[5π†] buttons. The ICON display includes several pages. Press the TAB [®] button to select different pages. To cancel the operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Press the [8π] (OK) button to apply the selected icon.

7

66

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

............. numbers (half size).... marks (half size) A B C.... Press the [7†] (FOLDER) button to call up the naming display for a new folder.. the following different types of characters and sizes can be entered: (kana-kan) ........... marks (full size) (kana) .........Alphabet (capital and small letters. making it easier to ﬁnd and select your original data.. marks (half size)
2
Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor to the desired position.. The maximum number of ﬁles/folders which can be stored in a folder in the USER tab is 250.....
Basic Operation
1
Change the type of character by pressing the [1π] button..
Entering Characters
The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your ﬁles/ folders and when inputting the Keyword for Music Finder function. folder directories can contain up to four levels...... numbers (full size).........
1 2
Call up the page of the File Selection display for which you wish to create a new folder.Alphabet (capital letters.. Entering characters should be done in the display shown below..
Folder directories for the USER tab display In the USER tab display.Alphabet (lowercase letters... marks (full size) (kana) ..Hiragana and Kanji. the following different types of characters are available: CASE.. half size)... full size).Katakana (normal size). Folders can be created.. • If you select a language other than Japanese as the Language (page 57).... marks (half size) • If you select Japanese as the Language (page 57).. half size)...Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)
Creating a New Folder
This operation lets you create new folders... half size).
3
Input the name of the new folder (see below)..... marks (half size) case ..
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
67
.... numbers (half size)..... numbers (half size). The maximum total number of ﬁles and folders which can be stored is 2960... named and organized as desired........... The method is much the same as inputting names and numbers to a conventional mobile phone.. marks (full size) ABC..
A new folder cannot be made in the PRESET tab...Katakana (half size)..Alphabet (capital and small letters... but this may differ depending on the length of the ﬁle names......

Basic Operation
4
Press the [8π] (OK) button to actually enter the new name and return to the previous display. press and hold down the appropriate button. • Entering the “hiragana” itself (without converting it) Press the [8π] (OK) button. accent. then press the [8π] (OK) button. press the [ENTER] button one or several times to convert the characters into the appropriate kanji. and press the [7†] (DELETE) button. • Entering numbers First. Japanese “ ” and “ ”) Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the [6†] button before actual entry of the character. • Clearing the reversed area at once Press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. press the [6†] button to call up the mark list.
In the case of characters which are not accompanied by special character marks (with the exception of kanakan and half-size katakana).
68
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. [6π] and [7π] button. • Converting into Kanji (Japanese language) When the input “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse display (highlighted). \/:*?"<>|
Several different characters are assigned to each button. • Entering marks 1 After actually entering a character by moving the cursor. or press it repeatedly until the desired number is selected.
• Deleting characters Move the cursor to the character you wish to delete by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. [2π†]– [5π†]. Then. • Actual entry of characters Move the cursor or press another letter-input button. select one of the following: “A B C” (full-size alphabet). • Entering special character marks (umlaut. To delete all characters on the line at once. • Changing the converted kanji back to “hiragana” Press the [7†] (DELETE) button. corresponding to the character you wish to enter. • Changing the reversed area Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial. for a while. and the characters change each time you press the button. press the [8π] (OK) button or enter the next character. To actually enter the change.
The following half-size marks cannot be entered for a ﬁle/ folder name. 2 Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor to the desired mark. you can call up the mark list by pressing the [6†] button after selecting a character (before actual entry of a character). “ABC” ”CASE“ (half-size capital alphabet) and “case” (half-size lowercase alphabet).Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)
3
Press the [2π†]–[6π†] and [7π] buttons. press and hold the [7†] (DELETE) button. • Canceling the character-entering operation Press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. When the input “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse display (highlighted): • Re-converting the characters into other kanji Press the [ENTER] button.

turn the [POWER] button ON. and user vocal harmony types created via the Mixing Console display to the original factory settings.
Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Independently by Item
Basic Operation
1 2
CAUTION
Call up the operation display. The same can be done also by turning the [POWER] button ON while holding the B6 key (right-most B key on the keyboard). Restores the MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab display to the original factory status. [FUNCTION] → [I]UTILITY → TAB[®]SYSTEM RESET Select items by pressing the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons.
Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory settings. and FILES&FOLDERS). refer to page 182. Temporarily deletes the current Registration Memory settings of the selected Bank. Restores the Music Finder data (all records) to the original factory settings. user master compressor types. USER EFFECT. To reset the Internet Settings. MUSIC FINDER. user master EQ types.Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings
Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings
Restoring the Factory-programmed System
While holding the C7 key (right-most key on the keyboard). Restores the User Effect settings including the user effect types. Deletes all ﬁles and folders stored in the User tab display. Refer to the separate Data List booklet for details about which parameters belong to the System Setup.
The operation of restoring the factory-programmed settings does not affect the Internet Settings.
SYSTEM SETUP
MIDI SETUP USER EFFECT
MUSIC FINDER FILES&FOLDERS REGIST
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
69
.
This operation deletes all your original data for the respective item (MIDI SETUP. This operation has the same result as and is a shortcut for the System Setup restore operation explained in step 2 of the following section.

user master EQ types. Call up the operation display. The User Effect settings including the user effect types. you can save your Original Settings as a Single File for future recall.
Parameters set on the various displays such as the [FUNCTION] → UTILITY and microphone setting display are handled as a single System Setup ﬁle.) Save your ﬁle (page 63). Note that the ﬁle in the PRESET tab display is the ﬁle of factory-programmed settings.
SYSTEM SETUP
MIDI SETUP USER EFFECT
MUSIC FINDER
4
Select one of the tabs (other than the PRESET) by pressing the TAB [√][®] buttons. If you select it. and user vocal harmony types created via the Mixing Console displays are managed as a single ﬁle. Refer to the separate Data List booklet for details on which parameters belong to the System Setup. select the tab and page to which you’ve saved the ﬁle (same tab and page as speciﬁed in step 4). [FUNCTION] → [I]UTILITY → TAB[®]SYSTEM RESET Press one of the [F]–[I] buttons to call up the relevant display for saving your data.
Basic Operation
1 2 3
Make all desired settings on the instrument.
5 6
70
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. All the preset and created records of the Music Finder are handled as a single ﬁle.
Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as a Single File
For the items below. and press the corresponding [A]–[J] button. (This is the same results as on page 69 “Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Independently by Item”. To recall your ﬁle. The MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab display are handled as a single ﬁle. Press the [D] button to execute the Factory Reset operation for all checkmarked items. the factory-programmed settings for the respective item will be restored. user master compressor types.Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings
3 4
Checkmark the box of the item to be reset to the factory programmed settings by pressing the [4π†] button.

Effect. 1/Prot. [FUNCTION] → [I] UTILITY → TAB [√]/[®] SYSTEM RESET Press one of the [F]–[I] buttons to call up the relevant display for saving your data. MIDI Template and System File
* Protected Songs (those with a “Prot. Effect**. Registration Memory Bank and Voice 2 Music Finder Record.2” is indicated at the upper left side of the ﬁle names) are included in the copied ﬁles.1” indication cannot be moved to external media. Songs with a “Prot. Select the appropriate tab (CARD or USB) to which you want to save the data by using the TAB [√]/[®] buttons.
3
Select the USER tab by using the TAB [√]/ [®] buttons.
Music Finder Record.
Backup procedure
Song. press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. To cancel the selection.
4
Press the [3†] (COPY) button to copy the ﬁle/folder. Data that can be saved 1 Song*. such as a SmartMedia card or USB storage device.Edited or saved data of the Vocal Harmony type. Press the [7†] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle/folder selection. If a message appears indicating data cannot be copied Protected Songs (“Prot. Style: Press the [STYLE SELECT] button. Style. Registration Memory Bank and Voice Data
1 2
Insert/connect the backup media (destination). Style.
Basic Operation
6 7 8
The backup procedure is different for the data types in 1 and 2 above.Data Backup
Data Backup
For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you copy or save your important data to separate storage media. These protected Songs cannot be copied. such as a SmartMedia card or USB storage device.” . However. Voice: Press one of the VOICE buttons. such as a SmartMedia card or USB storage device.1/Prot. This provides a convenient backup if the internal memory is damaged. Songs with a “Prot.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
71
.2” indication at the upper left of the ﬁle name) cannot be saved.2” indication can be moved (cut-and-paste operation) to a SmartMedia card with ID. **Effect data includes the following: . The pop-up window for the Copy operation appears at the bottom of the display. Select the destination Tab (CARD or USB) to which the ﬁle/folder is to be copied. Save your data (page 63). To cancel the Copy operation. BANK] button. However. by using the TAB [√]/[®] buttons. Call up the operation display. Call up the display containing the desired ﬁle to be copied.Edited or saved data in the Mixing Console “EFFECT/EQ/CMP. Songs with a “Prot.
5
Press the [6†] (ALL) button to select all ﬁles/folders indicated on the current display and all other pages. press the [6†] (ALL OFF) button again. Song: Press the [SONG SELECT] button. Press the [4†] (PASTE) button to paste the ﬁle/folder.2” indication can be moved (cut-and-paste operation) to a SmartMedia card with ID. MIDI Template and System Data
1 2 3 4 5
Insert/connect the backup media (destination). Registration Memory Bank: Press the [REGIST.

These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo......... In conventional instruments.... This makes the Clavinova Voices sound authentic and natural.... Any song/ style data you’ve created on the Clavinova using the Mega Voices will not sound properly when played back on other instruments........ letting you play the sounds from the keyboard....... Some of the guitar and bass Voices in particular have been created as Mega Voices for the Clavinova........ page 28 Playing Various Voices . letting you play the sounds from the keyboard.Using.... page 31
Reference
Voice Characteristics
The Voice type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name. each velocity range (the measure of your playing strength) has a completely different sound........ They are primarily designed for use with recorded MIDI sequence data (such as songs and styles).... They also take full advantage of Yamaha’s advanced sampling technology such as Stereo Sampling.. Sustain Sampling.. too—to make the sound quality and/ or level of a Voice according to how strongly or softly you play it.. However..... a Mega guitar Voice includes the sounds of various performance techniques. different Voices having those sounds would be called up via MIDI and played in combination to achieve the desired effect.
Natural! These rich and luscious Voices are comprised mostly of keyboard instrument sounds and are especially intended for playing piano and other keyboard parts..... However...
Live!
Using.... They are.... Creating and Editing Voices
Reference to Quick Guide pages
Playing Voices .. Normal Voices use velocity switching.... For example. a convincing guitar part can be played with just a single Voice....... This authentic organ Voice lets you use the Sound Creator to adjust the various footages and craft your own original organ sounds.....
Live!Drums Live!SFX
72
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
...... to produce a truly authentic... They give you a broader and more versatile range of Latin percussion than the normal drum Voices. The Mega Voices are not intended to be played from the keyboard.. very useful and convenient when creating MIDI data—especially when you want to avoid using several different Voices just for a single instrument part.... Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys........... These are high-quality drum sounds taking full advantage of Stereo Sampling and Dynamic Sampling............. with Mega Voices.............. These are high-quality Latin percussion sounds taking full advantage of Stereo Sampling and Dynamic sampling...... rich sound—full of atmosphere and ambience...... however.............. you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing! Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys..... These acoustic instrument sounds also beneﬁt from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology—and feature a sound so ﬁnely detailed and natural... now with Mega Voices. and Key-off Sampling. using speciﬁc velocity values to play the desired sounds........ See page 97 for details.. Dynamic Sampling.... What makes Mega Voices special is their use of velocity switching.......... Because of the complex nature of these Voices and the precise velocities need to play the sounds.... Creating and Editing Voices
Cool!
Sweet!
Drums SFX Organ Flutes!
Mega Voice
Mega Voices Compatibility Mega Voices are unique to the Clavinova and are not compatible with other models.......... page 28 Playing the Piano Voice ......... they’re not intended for playing from the keyboard. and are easily distinguished from the normal Voices by their icons in the Voice Selection display.. These Voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments—thanks to a huge amount of memory and some very sophisticated programming..

Right 2. and Left. This is used for normal performance—for example. It allows you to play several different Voices together in a layer. You can combine these parts by using the PART ON/OFF buttons to create a rich.
Specifying the split point (the border between the rightand left-hand range) See page 104. ■ Playing Three Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1. Left)
Voices can be assigned independently to each keyboard part: Right 1.
Left part
Right 1 part
Refer to page 75 for Voice selection operations for the Left part.
Keyboard Part Combinations
■ Playing a single Voice (Right 1 part) You can play a single Voice over the entire keyboard range.
Left part
Right 2 part Right 1 part
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
73
. For example. Creating and Editing Voices
Right 1 part
■ Playing Two Voices Simultaneously (Right 1 and 2 parts) You can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar Voices to create a thicker sound. Right 2.
Right 2 part Right 1 part
Refer to page 74 for Voice selection operations for the Right 2 part. ensemble sound. with the piano Voice. The keyboard lamp will light at the split point of the keyboard.
Reference
Keyboard Parts (Right 1.
Using.Playing Different Voices Simultaneously
Playing Different Voices Simultaneously
The Clavinova keyboard features various functions and performance conveniences that are simply unavailable on an acoustic instrument. ■ Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and Left parts) You can play different Voices with the left and right hands. try playing the bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right. 2 and Left parts) You can combine these three parts to create a rich.
Adjusting the volume balance among parts Adjust the volume balance among the parts in the BALANCE display (page 39). or play one Voice with your left hand while you play a different Voice (or even two layered Voices!) with your right. ensemble sound.

This is useful for turning the Right 2 part on and off while you play.
74
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.Playing Different Voices Simultaneously
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously (Right 1 and 2 Parts)
You can play two Voices simultaneously with the Right 1 and 2 parts. Creating and Editing Voices
Quickly selecting Voices for Right 1 and 2 parts You can quickly select the Right 1 and 2 part Voices. the name of the currently selected Voice is highlighted (reverse display) in the Main display. Press the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button to turn it on. then press another. Play the keyboard.
For the selected part.
A
F
5
B
G
4 5
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Switching the Right 2 part on/off with a pedal You can use a pedal to switch the Right 2 part on/off (when the Right 2 part is appropriately assigned.
3
Press one of the VOICE buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the Right 2 part. Press and hold one Voice button.
ORGAN FLUTES
4
Press the TAB [√] button to select the PRESET display.
5 6 7
Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice. while the Voice of the second pressed button is set for the Right 2 part.
1 2
Make sure the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] button is turned on. just from the Voice buttons.
Using. The Voice of the ﬁrst pressed button is automatically set for the Right 1 part. Press the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button again to turn it off. page 186).

3
Press one of the VOICE buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the Left part. Press the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button again to turn it off. Creating and Editing Voices
4
Press the TAB [√] button to select the PRESET display.
1 2
Make sure the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] button is turned on. page 186). Press the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn it on. This is useful for turning the Left part on and off while you play.
Specifying the split point (the border between the rightand left-hand range) See page 104.Playing Different Voices Simultaneously
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and Left Parts)
You can play different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and Left parts).
For the selected part.
Switching the Left part on/off with a pedal You can use a pedal to switch the Left part on/off (when the Left part is appropriately assigned. Play the keyboard. a √ mark appears at the right of the Voice name in the Main display.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
75
.
ORGAN FLUTES
Using.
A
F
5
B
G
4 5
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 6 7
Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice.

do not block or cover the speaker located on the underside of the keyboard (CVP-309 grand piano type) or the rear panel (CVP-309/307) of the Clavinova.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
2
Press one of the [2π†]–[4π†] buttons to select the iAFC type.
Selecting the iAFC Type and Adjusting the Depth
This section describes how to adjust various iAFC settings. similar to an acoustic musical instrument. and headphones are connected. If you select the “NATURAL SOUND BOARD” or “SPATIAL ENSEMBLE. Select the desired type: stage ambience simulation or acoustic piano resonance simulation. The depth can also be set for each type. Turning on the iAFC of the CVP-309 grand piano type To turn on the iAFC.
76
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. There are three iAFC types as shown below. • When the Speaker setting is Headphones SW (page 17). The optimal iAFC effect cannot be obtained if this speaker is blocked.” make sure to execute the calibration operation (page 77).Enhancing the Acoustic Realism of the Sound (iAFC)
Enhancing the Acoustic Realism of the Sound (iAFC)
iAFC cannot be used in the following cases. Each type consists of three sub-types. • When the Speaker setting is Off. The microphone is not used. Creating and Editing Voices
When using iAFC.
When iAFC is engaged (the default setting is ON). open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess.
iAFC uses Yamaha’s EMR (Electronic Microphone Rotator) technology to ensure stability against acoustic feedback. • DYNAMIC DAMPER Effect This simulates the sustain sound that occurs when you press the damper pedal of a grand piano. Sounds picked up by a microphone and sounds produced internally by the Clavinova are processed and output from the rear speaker to enhance the acoustic realism of the sound. but the sound produced within the Clavinova is processed to create a spacious sensation. such as selecting the iAFC type and adjusting the depth. When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay. The iAFC processing is most effective with the grand piano Voice (the one selected by pressing the PIANO button). the iAFC will not be turned on. • (CVP-309 grand piano type) When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay. the Clavinova will sound deeper and more resonant.
1
Press the [iAFC SETTING] button to call up the operation display.
Using.

and processed to create a virtual soundboard. it produces a more natural-sounding piano. the calibration may abort.
3 4
Press one of the [5π†]–[7π†] buttons to select the iAFC setting (sub-type). turn the iAFC feature off. you should perform the calibration once again.”
Note on using calibration While calibration is being performed. If this occurs. When used on a grand piano sound. and the settings will reset to their default values. Press the [G] (CALIBRATION START) button to begin calibration. Creating and Editing Voices
Calibrating the iAFC Settings
This automatically adjusts the sensitivity and response of iAFC so that the optimal iAFC effect will be obtained. do not make audible noises in the vicinity of the Clavinova. • SPATIAL ENSEMBLE Effect This lets you experience the ambience and reverberation that are characteristic of performing on stage. When calibration begins. The sound of the instrument itself and the sound of singing and other instruments played nearby is picked up by a microphone. Press the [8π†] button to adjust the iAFC depth. Make sure to execute this operation when you select “NATURAL SOUND BOARD” or “SPATIAL ENSEMBLE. Calibration will end in approximately two and a half minutes. 1 Press the [iAFC SETTING] button to call up the operation display. a fairly loud harpsichord note will sound four times at a ﬁxed interval. and processed to simulate the spatial characteristics of performing together on stage. If the iAFC effect is slight or inaudible: If it seems that iAFC is not effective when playing back Songs or Styles.Enhancing the Acoustic Realism of the Sound (iAFC)
• NATURAL SOUND BOARD This enhances the acoustic realism of the sound by recreating the resonance characteristics of acoustic instruments. Ambience and reverberation are also added to the performance of the musicians playing together with you. letting you enjoy the sensation of playing together on stage. 2 Press the [1†] button to turn iAFC off.
1 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
77
.
Using. If any extraneous sounds are made in the vicinity of the Clavinova during calibration.
1 2
Press the [F] (MIC CALIBRATION) button in the iAFC operation display (page 76) to call up the calibration display. The sound of the instrument itself is picked up by a microphone.

Changing Pitch
Changing Pitch
Transpose
Transpose the pitch of the keyboard up or down (in semitones).
You can ﬁne-tune the pitch of the entire instrument—useful when you play the Clavinova along with other instruments or CD music.0 Hz.
Call up the operation display. Creating and Editing Voices
Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument
Please note that the Tune function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit Voices. [FUNCTION] → [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [√] MASTER TUNE Use the [4π†]/[5π†] buttons to set the tuning.
1 2 3
Call up the operation display. Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired scale. Checkmark the box by pressing the [8π] button. [MIXING CONSOLE] → TAB [√][®] TUNE 2 Use the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons to set the transposition. [FUNCTION] → [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [®] SCALE TUNE Select the desired part for which you want to set the scale by using the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons.
2
Scale Tuning
You can select various scales for playing in custom tunings for speciﬁc historical periods or music genres.
Using. • Transposing during performance You can easily set the desired transposition of the overall sound of the instrument by pressing the TRANSPOSE [–]/[+] buttons. The tuning of each note for the currently selected scale is indicated in the keyboard illustration at the upper right of the display. song playback (SONG).
1
Hz (Hertz): This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound and represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in a second. 1 Call up the operation display.
78
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. • Transposing before performance Change the transpose settings in the MIXING CONSOLE display. respectively. You can set the transposition for the keyboard pitch (KBD). Press the 4 or 5’s [π] and [†] buttons simultaneously to reset the value to the factory setting of 440. or overall sound of the instrument (MASTER).

This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems.3 -10.3 3.3 2.7 0 -50.2 0 0
D
0 3.
Preset Scale Types
EQUAL TEMPERAMENT PURE MAJOR PURE MINOR PYTHAGOREAN The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts.1 -3.2 -50.1 0 -50.0 0
WERCKMEISTER
KIRNBERGER ARABIC 1 ARABIC 2
* In the display.3 -3. by making the major third interval more “in tune.3 2.1 -2.3 10.0 0
b Eb
0 15.8 -7.1 -10. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character.7 33.3 -11.2 -10. Creating and Editing Voices
MEAN-TONE
WERCKMEISTER KIRNBERGER
ARABIC
Tuning values for Preset Scales (base note: C) (in cents)
C EQUAL TEMPERAMENT PURE MAJOR PURE MINOR
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
# C#
0 -29.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
79
. (100 cents equal one semitone.
Cent: In musical terms a “cent” is 1/ 100th of a semitone.3 -2.9 3. These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale.3 -6.)
• Determines the base note for each scale.1 7.3 -2.
Using. This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale.9 0 0
B
0 -11.8 -11.9 7.1 -24. The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven.2 -7.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. • Tuning the individual notes of the keyboard (TUNE) 1 2 Press the [3π†] button to select the note for tuning. the rounded off value is shown.0 -3.1 0 0
b Ab
0
A
0
b Bb
0 18.7 -10. which are collapsed into a single octave.0
F
0 -2. Press the [2π†] button to select the base note. among others.2 -7.6 -15. especially for triad chords (root. but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads.0 -3.2 -10.8 -7. ﬁfth). The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable.0 18.3 0 0
# F#
0 -9.2 -14.3 -2.4 31.9 -3. Handel.0 -50.3 0 0
E
0 -14.0 -7. with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch.Changing Pitch
4
Change the following settings as necessary.7 -20.2 -6.8 0 0 -11.3 11.9 -7.1 -14. Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.3 -15.7 -11. used this scale. This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect ﬁfths. When the base note is changed.9 -3.6 15.6 14. and even now it is often used when performing period music on the harpsichord.1 15. third.3
PYTHAGOREAN
MEAN-TONE
-27. which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales.
Instantly recalling the desired scale Register the desired scale to the Registration Memory. yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes. Use the [4π†]/[5π†] buttons to set the tuning in cents.9 3. the pitch of the keyboard is transposed.6 -6.7 10.2 0 0
G
0 2. Be sure to checkmark the SCALE item when registering (page 125). You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies – such as choirs and a cappella singing.6 6.2 -17.6 14.8 -14. This is the most commonly used tuning in music today.7 -10.0
-27.

Press the [VOICE EFFECT] button to call up the VOICE EFFECT display.
1 2
Select the desired part for which you want to add effects by pressing one of the PART SELECT buttons. you can add ambience and depth to your music in a variety of ways—such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall. Creating and Editing Voices
1
2
3
You can use a pedal to turn the Harmony/Echo effects on and off (page 186). The portamento time (the pitch transition time) can be set via the MIXING CONSOLE display (page 84).
1 2 3
Call up the operation display.
Effect Parameters
HARMONY/ECHO MONO/POLY The Harmony/Echo types are applied to the right-hand Voices (page 81). DSP: Stands for Digital Signal Processor (or Processing).
Use the buttons at the lower part of the display to apply effects to the Voices. With the digital effects built into the Clavinova.
DSP/DSP VARIATION
Selecting the Harmony/Echo type
You can select the desired Harmony/Echo effect from a variety of types. You could use this while you play.
80
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. lead sounds (such as brass instruments) more realistically. to change the rotating speed (slow/fast) of the rotary speaker effect. • The DSP Variation switch is used to change between variations of the DSP effect. Using the MONO mode lets you play single. In order to make the type you’ve selected here effective. Use the [4π†]–[8π†] buttons to select various Harmony/Echo settings (page 82).
Using. set HARMONY/ECHO to On in the display shown in step 2 above. Portamento: Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the ﬁrst note played on the keyboard to the next. for example. • The DSP switch is used to turn the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) effect on or off for the currently selected keyboard part. The available settings differ depending on the Harmony/Echo type. [FUNCTION] → [F] HARMONY/ECHO Use the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons to select the Harmony/Echo type (page 81). DSP changes and enhances the audio signal in the digital realm to produce a wide range of effects. This determines whether the part’s Voice is played monophonically (only one note at a time) or polyphonically.Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard
Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard
The CVP features a sophisticated multi-processor effect system which can add extraordinary depth and expression to your sound. It also lets you expressively control the Portamento effect (depending on the selected Voice) by playing legato.

tremolo. ● Echo Types When one of the Echo Types is selected. Both of the keyboard part [RIGHT 1] and [RIGHT 2] should be turned on when using the Multi Assign effect.) Multi Assign Type This type applies a special effect to chords played in the right-hand section of the keyboard. depending on the particular effect applied.
Harmony Types These types apply the harmony effect to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the chord speciﬁed in the left-hand section of the keyboard.
Split point
Split point
Canceling the chord sound for the harmony effect This cancels the sound of the chord played in the chord range of the keyboard—letting you hear only the Harmony effect.
Chord section for Style playback and Harmony effect Split Point Split Point (for Style) (for keyboard Voice)
Left Voice and chord section for Harmony effect
Right 1 Right 2 Voices
Chord section Left Voice for Style playback and Harmony effect
Right 1 Right 2 Voices
● Multi Assign Type Multi Assign effect automatically assigns notes played simultaneously in the right-hand section of the keyboard to separate parts (Voices). set [SYNC START] to Off. Set [ACMP ON/OFF] to On. the Harmony effect is applied to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the type selected above and the chord speciﬁed in the chord section of the keyboard shown below. The Right 1 and Right 2 Voices are alternately assigned to the notes in the order you play. (Note that the “1+5” and “Octave” settings are not affected by the chord. trill) is applied to the note played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
81
. Keep in mind that Trill works when you hold down two notes on the keyboard simultaneously (last two notes if more than two notes are held). the corresponding effect (echo. and it plays those notes alternately.
Using. Echo Types These types apply echo effects to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo. regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] and the LEFT part on/off status.Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard
Harmony/Echo Types
The Harmony/Echo types are divided into the following groups. and select “Off” for the Stop Accompaniment parameter. Creating and Editing Voices
● Harmony Types When one of the Harmony Types is selected.

see the section “Adjustable items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE displays” on page 84. This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by your playing strength. and lets you set how the effects are applied.
2
A F B G C H
D
I
1.” It determines the level of the harmony/echo notes generated by the Harmony/Echo effect. 3
E
J
4
4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
2
Use the TAB [√]/[®] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. Creating and Editing Voices
Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)
The Mixing Console gives you intuitive control over aspects of the keyboard parts and Song/Style channels. Tremolo. This parameter is only available when Echo.” This lets you determine the keyboard part via which the harmony/echo notes will be sounded. This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.
Basic Procedure
1
Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display. This parameter is available when one of the Harmony Types is selected. The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly (above the set value).” It determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound. or Trill is selected in Type above. For information on the available parameters.” the Harmony effect is applied only to the note (played in the right-hand section of the keyboard) that belongs to a chord played in the chord section of the keyboard.
82
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. It lets you adjust the levels and stereo position (pan) of each Voice to set the optimum balance and stereo image.Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)
Harmony/Echo Settings
VOLUME This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign. including volume balance and the timbre of the sounds. Tremolo. It determines the speed of the Echo. This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign. When this is set to “ON. letting you create harmony accents in the melody.
SPEED
ASSIGN
CHORD NOTE ONLY
TOUCH LIMIT
Using. and Trill effects.

About Parts See below. you can independently adjust the level balance among the Keyboard parts (RIGHT 1. Creating and Editing Voices
About Parts PANEL PART In the PANEL PART display of the MIXING CONSOLE. The part name is indicated at the top of the display. simultaneously hold down one of the [A]–[J] buttons. • Saving the SONG CH 1–8/9–16 display settings First register the edited settings as part of the Song data (SET UP). 3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the RECORD display. SONG CH 1–8/9–16 A Song consists of sixteen separate channels. • Saving the PANEL PART display settings Register them to Registration Memory (page 125). These part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the SONG display.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
83
. RIGHT 2 and LEFT). 2 Press the [B] button to call up the STYLE CREATOR display. The various MIXING CONSOLE displays alternate among the following: PANEL PART display → STYLE PART display → SONG CH 1–8 display → SONG CH 9–16 display Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired parameter. STYLE PART A Style consists of eight separate channels. then save the Song. See the SONG CREATOR → CHANNEL display → SETUP item explanation on page 156. you can instantly set the same value to all other parts. Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to set the value. The MIXING CONSOLE displays actually consist of several different part displays. To do this. SONG. 1 Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button.
Using. then save it (page 63). Here you can adjust the level balance among these sixteen channels or parts. 4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display for saving your data. and MIC parts. These part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the STYLE display. The part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [BALANCE] button. STYLE.
4 5 6
Instantly setting all parts to the same value Once you’ve selected a parameter in step 4. Here you can adjust the level balance among these eight channels or parts. and use the [1]–[8] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial. • Saving the STYLE PART display settings Save them as Style data.Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)
3
Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button repeatedly to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display for the relevant parts. Save your MIXING CONSOLE settings.

Creating and Editing Voices
HARMONIC CONTENT BRIGHTNESS Allows you to adjust the resonance effect (page 95) for each part. Determines the level of each part or channel. The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time. neither Organ Flutes Voices nor User Voices can be selected. VOL/VOICE
• The RHY1 channel in the STYLE PART display cannot be assigned to Organ Flute Voices. or overall sound of the instrument (MASTER). When the Song channels are called up. This parameter is available when the selected keyboard part is set to Mono (page 80). Determines the stereo position of the selected part (channel). giving you ﬁne control over the balance of all the parts. Determines the brightness of the sound for each part by adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 95). After editing various parameters for the selected effect type. • When playing GM song data. Adjusts the amount of the DSP sound for each part or channel. Adjusts the amount of the Chorus sound for each part or channel. Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves for each keyboard part. Setting this to “0” results in no effect. • The RHY2 channel in the STYLE PART display can only be assigned to Drumkit Voices and SFX kit Voices. Allows you to set the transposition for the keyboard pitch (KEYBOARD). Adjusts the amount of the Reverb sound for each part or channel.Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)
Adjustable Items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE Displays
The following explanations cover the available items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE displays. When the Style channels are called up.
PANPOT VOLUME
FILTER
Using.
TUNE
PORTAMENTO TIME Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the ﬁrst note played on the keyboard to the next.
SONG AUTO REVOICE VOICE
See page 85. respectively. you can save it as an original effect. Allows you to re-select the Voices for each part. Determines the pitch of each keyboard part.
PITCH BEND RANGE OCTAVE TUNING TRANSPOSE
EFFECT
TYPE Select the desired effect type (page 87). Higher values result in a longer pitch change time. User Voices cannot be selected.” the currently selected reverb type name is shown. At the right side of the title indication of “REVERB. channel 10 (in the SONG CH 9–16 page) can only be used for a Drum Kit Voice.
REVERB
CHORUS DSP
84
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Song playback (SONG). Determines the range of the PITCH BEND in semitones for each keyboard part (when a pedal is assigned to this function).

When you play back any commercially available XG song data or that created on other instruments. Cool!.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
6
Use the [4π†]–[6π†] buttons to select the Voice for replacing the XG selected in step 5.
Using.) instead of the conventional XG Voices of the same type. All Voices are returned to the original XG Voices. In step 2. Use the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons to select the Voice to be replaced. This affects the overall sound of the CVP. For editing the EQ (page 89). for conveniently calling up the recommended Revoice settings in one action. Replaces only the recommended Voices that are suitable for playing back the song. ALL REVOICE: PIANO REVOICE: BASIC REVOICE: ALL NO REVOICE: Replaces all of the replaceable XG Voices with the high-quality Voices of the Clavinova. you can use Auto Revoice to automatically assign the specially created Voices of the Clavinova (Natural!.Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)
EQ (Equalizer)
TYPE Select the desired EQ type to suit the type of music and the performance environment (page 89).
Press the [G] (SETUP) button to call up the AUTO REVOICE SETUP display.
Song Auto Revoice
This feature lets you use the high-quality sounds of the instrument to full advantage with XG-compatible song data. This affects the overall sound of the CVP.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
85
. select the VOL/VOICE tab. Determines the center frequency of the low EQ band that is attenuated/boosted for each part.
EDIT EQ HIGH EQ LOW
CMP (Master Compressor) See page 91. Several different Revoice settings are available by using the [F]/[G]/[I] buttons. Live!. Creating and Editing Voices
1–3 4 5
Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 82. etc. Determines the center frequency of the high EQ band that is attenuated/boosted for each part. Replaces only the piano Voices.

6 7 8 9
Using. Use the [7π†]/[8π†] buttons to select the effect TYPE. go on to the next operation.Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)
Effect Block REVERB CHORUS DSP1
Effect-applicable parts All parts All parts
Effect characteristics Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz club. To select its variation parameter. Creating and Editing Voices
Use the [3π†]/[4π†] buttons to select the part to which you want to apply the effect. Use the [5π†]/[6π†] buttons to select the effect CATEGORY. RIGHT 1.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
10
If you have selected one of the DSP 2–5 effect blocks in step 5: You can edit its standard parameters as well as its variation parameter. such as distortion and tremolo. To select the standard type of parameters. that include additional effects usually used for a speciﬁc part. press the [E] button. ■ Editing and Saving the selected effect Press the [F] (PARAMETER) button to call up the display for editing the effect parameters. Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts are being played simultaneously.
If you want to edit the effect parameters.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
87
. RIGHT 2.
DSP2 DSP3 DSP4 DSP5 DSP6
Microphone sound
Dedicated for use only with the microphone sound. press the [B] button. SONG CHANNNEL 1–16 the Clavinova has special DSP effects. Any unused DSP blocks are automatically SONG CHANNEL 1–16 assigned to the appropriate parts (channels) as needed.
STYLE PART In addition to the Reverb and Chorus types. LEFT.

88
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Adjust the value for the selected parameter by using the [6π†]/ [7π†] buttons. category and type Use the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons. This is set for all parts or channels. CHORUS or DSP1 effect block in step 5: Adjust the Effect Return Level by pressing [8π†] button.Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)
Re-selecting the Effect block. Press the [H] (USER EFFECT) button to call up the display for saving your original effect.
13 14
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
15
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
14
15
Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the effect (page 63). The re-selected effect conﬁguration is displayed at the upper left side box in the display. If you have selected the REVERB. Use the [3π†]–[6π†] buttons to select the destination for saving the effect. The maximum number for effects that can be saved differs depending on the effect block.
Select one of the parameters you want to edit by using the [4π†]/ [5π†] buttons. When recalling the saved effect. use the same procedure as in step 8. press the [H] (NAME) button.
A
F
B
G
10
C
H
13
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
11
Using. If you want to change the effect name. Creating and Editing Voices
12
11 12
Effect Return Level: Determines the level or amount of effect applied. Available parameters differ depending on the selected Effect type.

Creating and Editing Voices
5 bands →
LOW LOW MID MID HIG MID HIGH EQ1 EQ2 EQ3 EQ4 EQ5
■ Select a Preset EQ type
1–3 4
Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 82. You can select one of the ﬁve preset EQ settings in the EQ display. go on to the next operation.
Gain Bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”)
0
Freq (Frequency)
Using. For example.
Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset EQ type to suit your performance (music style or environment). you can cut some of the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too “boomy. and save the settings to one of two User Master EQ types. ■ Editing and Saving the selected EQ
5
Press the [F] (EDIT) button to call up the MASTER EQ EDIT display. The Clavinova possesses a high-grade ﬁveband digital EQ.Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)
EQ (Equalizer)
Equalizer (also called “EQ”) is a sound processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands that can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response.
If you want to edit the EQ parameters.” or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively “dead” and free of echoes.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
89
. Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound from speakers to match the special character of the room. You can even create your own custom EQ settings by adjusting the frequency bands. select the EQ tab. a ﬁnal effect—tone control can be added to the output of your instrument. With this function. In step 2.

• Bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”) Use the [1π†]button. Use the [8π†] button to boost or cut all the ﬁve bands at the same time. • FREQ (center frequency) Use the [2π†]button. use the same procedure as in step 6. Up to two types of EQ can be created and saved. the narrower the band width.
90
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
9
Press the [H] or [I] (STORE 1 or 2) button to save the edited EQ type (page 63). Adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the band selected in step 7. When recalling the saved EQ type. The higher the value of Q.Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)
6
Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset EQ type. Creating and Editing Voices
7
7 8
Use the [3π†]–[7π†] buttons to boost or cut each of the ﬁve bands. The available FREQ range is different for each band.
6
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
9
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
Using.

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
91
. go on to the next operation. ■ Selecting a Master Compressor type
1–3 4
Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 82. it “squeezes” the dynamic range. effectively making soft sounds louder and loud sounds softer. You can edit and save your own custom Compressor types. In step 2. or conveniently select from one of the presets. select the CMP tab. more consistently high-level sound. such as vocals and guitar parts. When used with gain to boost the overall level.Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)
Master Compressor
Compressor is an effect commonly used to limit and compress the dynamics (softness/loudness) of an audio signal. or bring a drum kit or rhythm pattern further up-front in the mix. this creates a more powerful.
4
A
F
5
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
Press the [F] button to set the Master Compressor to ON. For signals that vary widely in dynamics. Creating and Editing Voices
Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset Master Compressor type. Selecting a Master Compressor type automatically sets the parameters (at the bottom of the display) to the optimum values for the type.
Using. Compression can be used to increase sustain for electric guitar. The Clavinova has a sophisticated multi-band compressor that allows you to adjust the compression effect for individual frequency bands—giving you detailed sonic control.
If you want to edit the Master Compressor parameters. smooth out the volume of a vocal.

The compressor affects only the sound of levels higher than that of Threshold. Creating and Editing Voices
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
Threshold: Determines the minimum level at which compression starts.Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)
■ Editing and Saving the selected Master Compressor
6
Use the [1π†]/[2π†] buttons to select the frequency curve for the Compressor. use the same procedure as in step 4. select “LOW” when you want to emphasize low frequencies.
A
F
B
G
C
H
8
D
I
E
J
Using. and “HIGH” when you want to emphasize high frequencies. press the [H] (NAME) button. For example.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the Master Compressor settings (page 63). If you want to change the name of the Master Compressor settings. These values offset those of the frequency curve settings in step 6. Press the [H] (USER) button to call up the display for saving your original Master Compressor settings.
7
7 8 9
Use the [3π†]–[7π†] buttons to determine the Threshold (minimum level at which compression starts) and Gain (level of compressed signal at three separate frequency bands).
92
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. When recalling the saved Master Compressor settings. Use the [3π†]–[6π†] buttons to select the destination for saving the Master Compressor settings. or which frequencies compression is applied to.

use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) to be edited.
Basic Procedure
1 2
Select the desired Voice (other than an Organ Flutes Voice) (page 31). The editing method is different for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices and for other Voices. Creating and Editing Voices
C
H
D
I
7
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3 4 5 6 7
Use the TAB [√]/[®] buttons to call up the relevant setting display.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
93
. For instructions on editing the ORGAN FLUTES Voices. the settings will be lost. see page 97. For information on the available parameters. As necessary. Press the [SOUND CREATOR] button to call up the SOUND CREATOR display. see the “Editable Parameters in the SOUND CREATOR Displays” on page 94.
CAUTION If you select another Voice without saving the settings. make sure to save the settings as a User Voice before selecting another Voice or turning the power off.
3 4 6 2 5
A F B G
Using. you can save it as a User Voice to the USER/CARD/(USB) display for future recall. Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the Voice. Once you’ve created a Voice. If you wish to store the settings here.
Editing the ORGAN FLUTES Voices The editing method is different for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices compared to other Voices. Press the [D] (COMPARE) button to compare the sound of the edited Voice with the unedited Voice. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Voice (page 63).Voice Creating (Sound Creator)
Voice Creating (Sound Creator)
The Clavinova has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own Voices by editing some parameters of the existing Voices.

Select “FLAT” if you feel the tuning curve of the piano Voice does not quite match that of other instruments Voices. the R1/R2 parameter is available. STRETCH Tuning curve particularly for pianos FLAT Tuning curve in which the frequency is octave doubled over the entire keyboard range Adjusts the volume of the key-off sound (the subtle sound that occurs when you release a key). Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the ﬁrst note played on the keyboard to the next. the LEFT parameter is available. Adjusts the depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal. The Sound Creator parameters are organized into ﬁve different displays. below. Creating and Editing Voices
SUSTAIN SAMPLE STRING RESONANCE
COMMON
VOLUME TOUCH SENSE Adjusts the volume of the current edited Voice. A setting of “0” produces more extreme drops in level. Sets the portamento time when the edited Voice is set to “MONO” above. or the wah effect.
PORTAMENTO TIME
CONTROLLER 1. Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter modulation.
FILTER AMPLITUDE LFO PMOD LFO FMOD LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter Cutoff Frequency. Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude.Voice Creating (Sound Creator)
Editable Parameters in the SOUND CREATOR Displays
The available parameters differ depending on the Voice. When the edited Voice is used as any of the RIGHT 1–2 parts. while a setting of “64” is normal response. PIANO This display is available only when the Natural! piano Voice (page 72) is selected. MODULATION When a pedal function is assigned to MODULATION.
TUNING CURVE Determines the tuning curve. Adjusts the depth of string resonance. or the tremolo effect. which are automatically called up when the Voice is selected. These are also treated as part of the Voice Set parameters (page 100). For details about the ﬁlter.
KEY OFF SAMPLE
Using. or how greatly the volume responds to your playing strength. Adjusts the touch sensitivity. Shifts the octave range of the edited Voice up or down in octaves. Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude (volume).
94
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
PART OCTAVE
MONO/POLY
Portamento Time: The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time. see page 95. Here. the more softly you play. Determines whether the edited Voice is played monophonically or polyphonically (page 80). the pedal can be used to modulate the parameters below as well as the pitch (vibrato). you can set the degree to which the pedal modulates each of the following parameters.
The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays explained in step 3 of the “Basic Procedure” on page 93. when the edited Voice is used as the LEFT part. and “127” produces high volume for any playing strength (ﬁxed). Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the pitch. The parameters in each display are described separately. or the vibrato effect.

) Selects the function to be assigned to the left pedal. RIGHT 2.
SOUND ● FILTER Filter is a processor that changes the timbre or tone of a sound by either blocking or passing a speciﬁc frequency range. In addition to making the sound either brighter or mellower. see page 187. synthesizer–like effects. LEFT. For details on the pedal functions. see page 186. Creating and Editing Voices
Volume Cutoff frequency
These frequencies are “passed” by the ﬁlter. set in BRIGHTNESS above (see diagram). This also determines the depth for the function. The parameters below determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range. Filter can be used to produce electronic.
Frequency (pitch) Cutoff range
HARMONIC CONTENT
Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency (resonance). etc.
FUNCTION [2π†]–[8π†] buttons (RIGHT 1. For details. LEFT PEDAL This allows you to select the function to be assigned to the left pedal. Higher values result in a brighter sound.
BRIGHTNESS Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the ﬁlter (see diagram). Determines whether the assigned function is effective or not for the respective keyboard part.Voice Creating (Sound Creator)
2.
Volume Resonance
Frequency (pitch)
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
95
. Higher values result in a more pronounced effect.
Using.

Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato. REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH/DSP DEPTH
REVERB DEPTH CHORUS DEPTH DSP DEPTH Adjusts the reverb (page 87) depth. the quicker the decay. Determines whether the DSP is on or off. you can do so in the DSP menu explained on page 97. This will be displayed only if VIBE VIBRATE is selected for the DSP Type parameter explained on page 87. Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect. Determines whether VIBE VIBRATE should be set to on or off when selecting the Voice.
Level Sustain level
RELEASE
ATTACK
DECAY
RELEASE
Time
Using. the quicker the attack. This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments—such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds. The lower the value. Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released. Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset. vibrating sound effect that is produced by regularly modulating the pitch of the Voice. The lower the value.
DEPTH SPEED DELAY
Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect.
ATTACK DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the key is played. Adjusts the DSP (page 87) depth.Voice Creating (Sound Creator)
● EG The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. If you want to re-select the DSP type. or the long release of a sustained piano tone. Adjusts the chorus (page 87) depth. page 186). the quicker the decay.
DSP ON/OFF VIBE ROTOR
96
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Creating and Editing Voices
Key on
Key off
● VIBRATO
Vibrato: A quavering. Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a slightly lower level than maximum).
Switching the VIBE ROTOR on/off with a pedal You can use a pedal to switch the VIBE ROTOR on/off (when the VIBE ROTOR ON/OFF function is properly assigned.
Pitch
SPEED
DEPTH DELAY
Time
EFFECT/EQ 1. The lower the value. Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect.

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
97
. If you select VARIATION ON here.Voice Creating (Sound Creator)
2. EQ
EQ LOW/HIGH These determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands. you can edit the VARIATION on/off status and variationparameter value setting. ON/OFF The factory-programmed assignments are set to variation-off for all Voices (standard variation of DSP is assigned). you can create your own sounds by adjusting the levels of the ﬂute footages. VALUE Adjusts the value of the DSP variation parameter.
Basic Procedure
1
Select the desired Organ Flutes Voice to be edited (page 31). DSP
DSP TYPE VARIATION Selects the DSP effect category and type. The variation parameter value can be adjusted in the VALUE menu explained below. a variation of the DSP effect is assigned to the Voice. PARAMETER Displays the variation parameter. Here.
Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices
The Clavinova features a variety of lush.
Using. Two variations are provided for each DSP type. Just as on a traditional organ. It also gives you the tools to create your own original organ sounds by using the Sound Creator function. dynamic organ Voices that you can call up with the [ORGAN FLUTES] button. See page 80. Creating and Editing Voices
HARMONY Same as in the [FUNCTION] → [F] HARMONY/ECHO display.
3. Select a type after selecting a category.

(When selecting the EFFECT/EQ tab display. press the [7π] (FOOTAGE) button to call up the SOUND CREATOR [ORGAN FLUTES] display. For information on the available parameters. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited ORGAN FLUTES Voice (page 63). If you wish to store the settings here. [F]–[H] and [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the Voice. the settings will be lost. use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the parameter to be edited.
If you select the EFFECT/EQ tab display. Creating and Editing Voices
3
Use the TAB [√]/[®] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. Use the [A]–[D].
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using. make sure to save the settings as a User Voice before selecting another Voice or turning the power off.Voice Creating (Sound Creator)
2
In the ORGAN FLUTES Voice Selection display. see the “Editable Parameters in the SOUND CREATOR [ORGAN FLUTES] displays” on page 99.)
4
A F B G C H
3
D
I
6
E
J
5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
4 5
CAUTION If you select another Voice without saving the settings.
6
98
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.

which are automatically called up when the Voice is selected. Footage: The term “footage” is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs. the greater the volume. Creating and Editing Voices
FOOTAGE
16' ← → 5 1/3' 16'–1'
Switches the controllable footage (by using the [D] button). Sets the Vibrato depth to one of three levels: 1 (low). the slower the swell and release. The higher the value of the setting. the greater the attack sound volume. The longer the graphic bar. The Organ Flutes parameters are organized into three different pages. 2 2/3'. The longer the graphic bar. FOOTAGE. These are also treated as part of the Voice Set parameters (page 100). the 16' setting determines the lowest pitched component of the Voice. Alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (see “EFFECT/EQ” DSP TYPE parameter on page 97). attack is applied equally to all notes. between 16' and 5 1/3'. The longer the pipe. or 3 (high). attack is applied only to the ﬁrst notes played and held simultaneously.
VIBRATO SPEED MODE
4'. the longer the decay. 2-2/3' and 2' controls increase or reduce the volume of attack sound at the corresponding footages. in which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths (in feet). The longer the graphic bar. any subsequently played notes have no attack applied. Affects both the attack and release (page 96) portion of the sound. the lower the pitch of the sound. the greater the volume of the corresponding footage. The 4'. below. These determine the attack sound volume of the ORGAN FLUTE Voice.Voice Creating (Sound Creator)
Editable Parameters in the SOUND CREATOR [ORGAN FLUTES] displays
The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays explained in step 3 of the “Basic Procedure” on page 97. The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH. 2 (mid). Affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay immediately after the initial attack. The parameters in each page are described separately.
VIBRATO ON/OFF VIBRATO DEPTH
Using.
VOLUME/ATTACK
VOL RESP Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. while the ﬁrst notes are held. In the EACH mode. In the FIRST mode. and the Voice Effect DSP (page 97) is turned on (this parameter has the same effect as the Voice Effect VARIATION ON/OFF parameter). based on the FOOTAGE controls. VOLUME/ATTACK (common parameters)
ORGAN TYPE ROTARY SP SPEED Speciﬁes the type of organ tone generation to be simulated: Sine or Vintage. 2'
LENG
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
99
. increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release. Alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes Voice ON or OFF. The higher the value. Mixing various volumes of the footages lets you create your own distinctive organ sounds. Determines the basic sound of the organ ﬂutes. while the 1' setting determines the highest pitched component. Hence. Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On/Off and Vibrato Depth above.

SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET → TAB [®] VOICE SET 2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a keyboard part.
Using. if you want to change the Voice yet keep the same Harmony effect. etc. However. 3 Use the [4π†]–[8π†] buttons to enable/disable automatic calling up of the settings (ON or OFF) independently for each parameter group. you can also disable this feature by the operation in the relevant display as explained below.
Disabling automatic selection of Voice Sets (effects. For example. You can set these independently by keyboard part and parameter group. Refer to the separate Data List for a list of parameters contained in each parameter group. 1 Call up the operation display.Voice Creating (Sound Creator)
EFFECT/EQ Same parameters as in the SOUND CREATOR “EFFECT/EQ” tab display explained on page 96. [FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST. including effects and EQ. set the HARMONY/ECHO parameter to OFF (in the display explained below).) Each Voice is linked to its related parameter settings that are indicated in the SOUND CREATOR displays. Creating and Editing Voices
100
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Usually these settings are automatically called up when a Voice is selected.

.... as well as special riffs with chord changes..... There are seven types of ﬁngerings........
1 2
Call up the operation display....... page 46 Learning How to Play (Indicate) Chords for Style Playback .... page 49
Style Characteristics
The Style type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style name. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
Reference to Quick Guide pages
Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto Accompaniment Feature ........ [FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB [®] CHORD FINGERING Press the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons to select a ﬁngering.......... page 44 Pattern Variation .............
Pro
These Styles provide professional and exciting arrangements combined with perfect playability..... Just by playing the proper chords with your left hand......................... These have been programmed to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of certain songs and in certain genres. your chord changes and colorful harmonies are instantly transformed into lifelike musical accompaniment.......... The resulting accompaniment exactly follows the chords of the player...... however....
These Styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes. In some cases for example.....
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
101
.............. Keep in mind....... page 48 Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style (One Touch Setting) ........ you can automatically add complicated............ As a result. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
Pianist
Selecting a Chord Fingering Type
Style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the chord section of the keyboard....... with the Main sections.............. playing a simple major triad for a country song may result in a “jazzy” seventh chord......... that the Styles may not necessarily be appropriate—or even harmonically correct—for all songs and for all chord playing......... professional-sounding arpeggios and bass/chord patterns........... These special Styles provide piano-only accompaniment.......... or playing an on-bass chord may result in inappropriate or unexpected accompaniment........Using.....
Session
Using....

so you can use either type of ﬁngering without having to switch ﬁngering types. Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to stop the rhythm. playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right.
1 2 3 4
Select a Style (page 45). or by playing a chord with your left hand and a melody note with your right. while the CVP supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm. with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord.
The rhythm does not sound for the Pianist Styles (or other similar Styles). always make sure that ACMP ON/OFF is turned on. the CVP will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything. if Sync Start is enabled (turn on the [SYNC START] button). even if you split the notes between your left and right hands—for example. Accepts the same ﬁngerings as the Fingered. Basically the same as Fingered.Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style
SINGLE FINGER
Makes it simple to produce orchestrated accompaniment using major. etc. You can sound different rhythms for each Style. anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. This type is similar to Full Keyboard. Try to play the melody along with just the rhythm. You don’t have to worry about specifying the Style chords. simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left. Lets you ﬁnger your own chords on the Chord section of the keyboard. some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] to turn Auto Accompaniment off. This type is available only for Style playback. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
AI FINGERED
AI: Artiﬁcial Intelligence
AI FULL KEYBOARD When this advanced ﬁngering type is engaged. 9th. Keep in mind. Chords are detected in a way similar to Fingered. Although the AI Full Keyboard type is designed to work with many songs.
Cm
For a minor chord. Detects chords in the entire key range. seventh.
102
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
C7
For a seventh chord.
Starting the rhythm with Sync Start You can also start the rhythm simply by playing a key of the chord section of the keyboard. etc. minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the Chord section of the keyboard. The Fingered type recognizes the various chord types which are listed on the separate Data List booklet and can be looked up using the Chord Tutor function (page 48). Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to play back the rhythm channels. When you want to use any of these Styles. press the root key only. that not all Styles contain rhythm channels. but the lowest note played in the Chord section of the keyboard is used as the bass note. simultaneously press the root key a both a white and black key to its left
MULTI FINGER FINGERED
Automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord ﬁngerings.
Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style
Rhythm is one of the most important parts of a Style.
FINGERED ON BASS
FULL KEYBOARD
Using. The abbreviated chord ﬁngerings described at right are used:
C
For a major chord. allowing you to play “on bass” chords (in the Fingered mode the root of the chord is always used as the bass note). This type is available only for Style playback. 11th and 13th chords cannot be played. however. simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left.).). bass. and chord accompaniment in the selected Style. with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord.
Cm 7
For a minor-seventh chord.

and [SYNC START] to off.Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style
Turning channels of the Style on/off A Style contains eight channels: RHY1 (Rhythm 1) – PHR2 (Phrase 2).
Using. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
Playing the chords in free tempo (without Style playback) You can have the accompaniment chords sound without playing back the Style. Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out. To cancel SOLO. or go from minimum to maximum. simply press the appropriate channel button again. by setting [ACMP ON/OFF] to on. press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button again. 1 Call up the operation display. or go from maximum to minimum. For example. if MULTI FINGER is selected (page 102). you can perform with your own pace while sounding the chord by pressing the chord section of the keyboard with your one ﬁnger. Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out. hold down the appropriate button for the channel to set the channel to SOLO.
Setting the fade in/out time You can set the time of the fade in and fade out (page 47). You can add variations and change the feeling of a Style by selectively turning channels on/off as the Style plays.
FADE IN TIME FADE OUT TIME FADE OUT HOLD TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in. [FUNCTION] → [I] UTILITY → TAB[√] CONFIG 1 → [A] FADE IN/OUT/ HOLD TIME 2 Set the parameters related to fade in/out by using the [3π†]– [5π†] buttons. To listen to only one instrument by itself. When the STYLE tab is not selected.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
103
. 1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the CHANNEL ON/ OFF display.
2 Press the [1†]–[8†] buttons to turn the channels on or off.

LEFT and RIGHT 1– 2. These two settings can be set to the same note (as in the default) or two different notes as desired. The two Split Point settings (below) are speciﬁed as note names.
1 2
Call up the operation display. the LEFT part section and the RIGHT 1 and 2 section. including Split Point and many others—which can be accessed in the display below.
Split Point (L) cannot be set lower than Split Point (S). Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
• SPLIT POINT These are the settings (there are two Split Points) that separate the different sections of the keyboard: the Chord section. • Split Point (S)— separates the Chord section for Style playback from the section(s) for playing Voices (RIGHT 1.
Chord section
Voice LEFT
Voice RIGHT 1and 2
Press the [H] (S) button or the [G] (L) button and rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial. Setting the Split Point (S) and the Split Point (L) to the same note
Split Point (S+L)
Chord section + Voice LEFT
Voice RIGHT 1and 2
Press the [F] (S+L) button and rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
104
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.Style Playback-related Settings
Style Playback-related Settings
The CVP has a variety of Style playback functions.
Setting the Split Point (S) and the Split Point (L) to different notes
Split Point (S) Split Point (L)
Specifying the Split Point by note name Press the [7π†]/[8π†] (SPLIT POINT) button.
Split Point settings
Parameters
Using. and you can specify the Split Point of the left and right Voices by using LEFT. [FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB[√] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT Use the [F]–[H] buttons to set the Split Point (see below) and use the [1π†]–[5π†] buttons for each setting (page 105). 2 and LEFT) • Split Point (L)— separates the two sections for playing Voices. and Split Point (S) cannot be set higher than Split Point (L). You can specify the Split Point of the Voice and chord section of the keyboard by using STYLE in the display.

• Synchro Stop Window This determines how long you can hold a chord before the Synchro Stop function is automatically cancelled...”
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
105
.... This conveniently resets Style playback control to normal......The chord played in the chord section will sound via the speciﬁed Voice...... (The [OTS LINK] button must be on. When the [SYNC STOP] button is turned on and this is set to a value other than “OFF. after you press a MAIN VARIATION button. When any of the MAIN A-D sections is not included in the Style data.... • Section Set Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting different Styles (when Style playback is stopped).... In this condition—called “Stop Accompaniment”— any valid chord ﬁngerings are recognized and the chord root/type are shown in the display..... you can determine whether the chord played in the chord section will sound or not in the Stop Accompaniment status.. From the display in page 104.. • Style Touch Turns touch response for the Style playback on/off.. the nearest section is automatically selected. When set to “OFF” and Style playback is stopped.... • OTS Link Timing This applies to the OTS Link function (page 50)....) Real Time... For example. When this is set to “ON....... letting you release the keys and still have the Style play.... the active section is maintained even if the different Style is selected. MAIN C will be called up.....The chord played in the chord section will not sound....
Using...... Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
Data that is recorded when recording a Song Please note that both the Voice that is sounded and the chord data will be recorded when set to “STYLE.Style Playback-related Settings
• Stop Accompaniment When [ACMP ON/OFF] is turned on and [SYNC START] is off.. when MAIN D is not contained in the selected Style........One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a MAIN VARIATION button....The chord played in the chord section will sound via the Voices of the selected Style........... and still hear the accompaniment chord.......” and only the chord data will be recorded when set to “OFF” or “FIXED.” the Style volume changes in response to your playing strength in the chord section of the keyboard... STYLE..... you can play chords in the chord section of the keyboard with the Style stopped......... Next Bar ............. OFF....” this automatically cancels the Synchro Stop function if you hold a chord for longer than the time set here.One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure......... This parameter determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change with the MAIN VARIATION [A]– [D] change.. regardless of the selected Style.. FIXED .

1 2 3
Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display. You can also save your favorite records in the FAVORITE display. etc.
Searching the Records
Using.
F
G
H
I
J
4
Clear the search criteria To clear the entered Music/Keyword/Style.) Call up the “STYLE PART” display in step #3 of the Basic Procedure in “Editing the Volume Balance and Voice Combination (MIXING CONSOLE)” on page 82.Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Style (MIXING CONSOLE)
Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Style (MIXING CONSOLE)
You can set various mixing-related parameters of the Style. (See “Adjustable items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE display” on page 84.
106
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
Convenient Music Finder feature
Music Finder (page 50) is a convenient feature that calls up pre-programmed panel settings (for Voices. The records of the Music Finder can be searched and edited. Press the [I] (SEARCH 1) button to call up the Search display. The ALL tab display contains the preset Records.
Enter the search criteria. press the [F]/[G]/[H] (CLEAR) button. Press the TAB [√] button to select the ALL tab. using the Search function of the Music Finder.) that match the song or type of music you want to play. Styles. and follow the instructions. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
You can search the records by specifying a song name or keyword.

........ The Search 1 display appears.... GENRE .. The search result is displayed in the SEARCH 2 display..
1
Select the desired record from the Music Finder display........ Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
5
Press the [8π] (START SEARCH) button to start the search.... press the [8†] (CANCEL) button.
Using.. or the keyword (page 67).
Entering several different keywords You can search several different keywords simultaneously by inserting a separator (comma) between each.....
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
107
..... showing the results of the search.. 2 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Style.Convenient Music Finder feature
• Search by song title or music genre (MUSIC) or keyword 1 Press the [A] (MUSIC)/[B](KEYWORD) button to call up the character entry display........ BEAT .Select the beat (time signature) you want to use in your performance by pressing the [D] button........
Creating a Set of Favorite Records
As convenient as the Search function is in plumbing the depths of the Music Finder records..) TEMPO..Select the desired music genre by using the [5π†]/ [6π†] (GENRE) buttons.....Set the range of the tempo you want to use in your performance by using the [1π†]/[2π†] (TEMPO) buttons.... (These correspond to the tabs at the top of the Music Finder display. • Adding other Search Criteria You can specify other search criteria in addition to the song name/keyword/Style name. All beat settings are included in the search if you select ANY.. you may want to create a “folder” of favorite records—so you can quickly call up those Styles and settings you use most often in your performance.. Detailed Search When you want to search the records further based on the results of the above search or search other music genres.... SEARCH AREA ........Select the pages to be included in the search by pressing the [E] button... 2 Enter the song title or music genre..... • Search by Style name 1 Press the [C] (STYLE) button to call up the Style selection display.. press the [J] (SEARCH 2) button in the Music Finder display... 3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the search display... To cancel searching.........

Convenient Music Finder feature
2
Press the [H] (ADD TO FAVORITE) button to add the selected record to the FAVORITE display. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
1 2
Select the record you want to delete from the FAVORITE display. If you want to keep the original preset. make sure to change the name and register the edited record as a new record (see step 5. Press the [8π†] (RECORD EDIT) button to call up the Edit display.
108
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. and check to see if the record has been added.
Editing Records
You can create a new record by editing the currently selected record.
Deleting Records from the FAVORITE Display
Using.
1 2
Select the desired record to be edited in the Music Finder display. page 109).
CAUTION You can also change a preset record to create a new one.
F
G
H
I
J
3
Call up the FAVORITE display by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. The newly created records are automatically saved in the internal memory. Press the [H] (DELETE FROM FAVORITE) button.
3
Edit the record as desired.

When creating a new genre.
• Creating a new record Press the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. when you want to have a selected Style automatically be set up to start with an Intro section. Press the [6†] button to save the ﬁle (page 63). If you set the record as a Favorite in step 4 above. • Memorizing the Section (Intro/Main/Ending) Use the [2π†]/[4π†] buttons to select the section that will automatically be called up set when the record is selected. • Changing the Tempo Press the [1π†] (TEMPO) button.
Searching by Beat (time signature) When searching records according to their beat (time signature). • Editing the Genre Select the desired genre by using the [5π†]/[6π†] (GENRE) buttons. the record is added to both the ALL display and the FAVORITE display. Keep in mind that the Beat setting made here is only for the Music Finder search function. All records are saved together as a single ﬁle. [FUNCTION] → [I]UTILITY → TAB[®] SYSTEM RESET → [I] MUSIC FINDER FILES Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the location for saving (USER/ CARD). • Overwriting an existing record Press the [8π] (OK) button.Convenient Music Finder feature
• Editing the song name/keyword/Style name Input each item in the same way as done in the Search display (page 107).
1 2 3
Call up the Save display. When you edit the record in the FAVORITE display. The record is added to the ALL display.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
109
. press the [7π†] (GENRE NAME) button and input the genre name.
The maximum number of records is 2500. press the [D] (BEAT) button. the record is added to the FAVORITE display. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
To enter the edited record to the FAVORITE display. • Canceling and Quitting the Edit functions Press the [8†] (CANCEL) button.
Saving the Record
The Music Finder feature handles all the Records including the presets and additionally created records as a single ﬁle. including internal records. the record is overwritten. press the [E] (FAVORITE) button to turn on the FAVORITE. Keep in mind that individual records (panel setups) cannot be handled as separate ﬁles.
4 5
Using. (page 68) • Deleting the Currently Selected Record Press the [I] (DELETE RECORD) button. for example. Enter the edits you’ve made to the record as described below. This is useful. If you’ve entered the record to the FAVORITE display in step 4 above. this does not affect the actual Beat setting of the Style itself.

4 Press the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Music Finder ﬁle. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [I] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] SYSTEM RESET 2 Press the [I](MUSIC FINDER) button to call up the Music Finder USER/CARD tab display. • APPEND The records called up are added to the vacant record numbers. When you select a ﬁle. • REPLACE All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with the records of the selected ﬁle. 3 Use the TAB [√][®] buttons to select USER/CARD. follow the instructions below.
CAUTION Selecting “REPLACE” automatically deletes all your original records from internal memory and replaces them with the factory Music Finder data.
Using. Select one of the settings above to call up the Music Finder ﬁle. Select “CANCEL” to abort this operation. a message appears prompting you to select one of the menu items below.Convenient Music Finder feature
Calling up Music Finder Records Saved to USER/CARD To call up the Music Finder records you’ve saved to USER/CARD. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
2
E
J
3
A F B G C H
D
I
E
J
4
4
110
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
Restoring the Music Finder Data You can restore the CVP’s Music Finder to its original factory settings (page 69).

you could take rhythm patterns from the “Live8Beat” Style. you can create a Style by separately recording the channels. ■ Realtime Recording ➤ See page 112 This method lets you record the Style by simply playing the instrument. since it allows you to enter each note or individually. use the bass pattern from “Cool8Beat” Style and import the chord patterns from the “8BeatModern” Style—combining the various elements to create one Style. With the Style Creator feature.
Style Section Four different Fill-ins are available. This allows you to create a Style without having to play the parts on the instrument. You can select an internal Style that most closely matches your image of the Style you want to create and then re-record parts of the Style as desired. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
Creating a Style
You can use one of the three different methods described below to create a Style. The created Styles can also be edited (page 117).Style Creator
Style Creator
You can create your own Styles—recording them by yourself or by combining the internal Style data.
Live8Beat
Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2
8BeatModern
Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2
Cool8Beat
Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2
Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
111
. since you can enter each event manually. or you can create a new Style from scratch. For example. ■ Style Assembly ➤ See page 116 This convenient feature lets you create composite Styles by combining various patterns from the internal preset Styles.
Style Structure
Styles are made up of ﬁfteen different sections and each section has eight separate channels. or by importing pattern data from other existing Styles. if you want to create your own original 8-beat Style. Channel
Using. and specify its length. ■ Step Recording ➤ See page 115 This method is like writing music notation on paper. The created Styles can be edited.

” and Style recording is also done using loops. In Style recording. delete the original data before recording. When using realtime recording based on the internal Styles:
Using. letting you overdub new material to the loop while hearing previously recorded material. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition. For example. Delete the data before recording.
Realtime Recording Characteristics
• Loop Recording Style playback repeats the rhythm patterns of several measures in a “loop. Use the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the BASIC tab. Overdub recording is not possible on channels BASSPHR2 (see above). Call up the display for selecting sections. the recorded data is not deleted. For example. if you start recording with a two-measure main section. if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN section. Press the [B] button to call up the Style Creator display.
1
When recording channels BASSPHR2 based on an internal Style. letting you record while hearing previously recorded material.
Select the desired Style to serve as the basis for recording/editing (page 45). the two measures are repeated many times.
Overdub recording not possible. etc. without deleting the original data. For all other channels (except rhythm). the two measures are repeatedly recorded.
2 3 4 5
112
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. except when using functions such as Rhythm Clear (page 114) and Delete (page 113). When creating a Style based on an existing internal Style. using realtime recording. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
Overdub recording possible. delete the original data before recording. When creating a new Style from scratch. • Overdub Recording This method records new material to a channel already containing recorded data.Style Creator
Realtime Recording (BASIC)
Create a single Style by recording the individual channels one-by-one. press the [C] (NEW STYLE) button from the display shown in step 5 below. Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button. overdub recording is applied only to the rhythm channels. by pressing the [EXIT] button. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop).

Limits on the recordable Voices • RHY1 channel: Any except Organ Flute Voice • RHY2 channel: Only drum/SFX kits • BASS–PHR2 channels: Any except Organ Flute Voice and drum/SFX kits Muting speciﬁc channels during recording Turn off the desired channels by pressing the [1†]–[8†] buttons.
Using. [1†]–[8†]. To delete a channel. you can press the [F] (REC CH) button to re-display it. simultaneously hold down the [J] (DELETE) button and press the appropriate numbered button.
You cannot select the INTRO 4/ ENDING 4 section directly from the panel.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
6
7-1
7 8
Use the [5π†]/[6π†] buttons to determine the length (number of measures) of the selected section.Style Creator
6
Use the [3π†]/[4π†] buttons to select the section (page 111) to be recorded. before releasing your ﬁnger from the [J] button. To cancel the selection.
A
F
8 10 5
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
9 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
Call up the Voice Selection display by using the [1π]–[8π] buttons and select the desired Voice for the corresponding recording channels. Actually enter the speciﬁed length for the selected section by pressing the [D] (EXECUTE) button.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
113
.etc) on the panel. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.
When the channel indication at the lower part of the display disappears. [1π]–[8π]. You can cancel the deletion by pressing the same numbered button again. Change the sections by using the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons and execute the selection by pressing the [8π] button.
A
F
B
G
C
H
7-2
D
I
E
J
Specifying sections from the panel buttons You can specify the sections to be recorded by using the Section buttons ([INTRO]/[MAIN]/[ENDING]. Pressing one of the Section buttons calls up the SECTION display. press the appropriate numbered button [1†]–[8†] again. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
Call up the RECORD display by pressing the [F] (REC CH) button (if necessary) . Specify the channel to be recorded by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and pressing the appropriate numbered button.

e.
114
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. C.
12 13 14
CAUTION The recorded Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation (page 63). G. To continue recording with another channel. 2). see page 122.
Using the data recorded here. A. simultaneously hold down the [E] (RHY CLEAR) button (from the display where the recorded channels are shown) and press the appropriate key. simultaneously hold down the [F] (REC CH) button and press the appropriate [1†]–[8†] button to specify the channel. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
• Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD channels (i. C.
11
Start recording by pressing the Style Control [START/STOP] button.
Any desired chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO and ENDING sections. the chord notes and recommended notes will also change. You can change the Source Chord (its root and type) from the PARAMETER display on page 121. Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 63).
Rules when recording non-rhythm channels • Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE channels (i. For details on chord notes and recommended notes.
C R C C R C
C = Chord notes C. set the PLAY ROOT and PLAY CHORD parameters on the PARAMETER page (page 121) before recording. and B).Style Creator
Deleting the recorded rhythm channel (RHY 1. Stop recording by pressing the Style Control [START/STOP] button. and is set by default to CM7 (as in the example illustration above).. listening to the previous sounds as they play. then play the keyboard. the auto accompaniment (Style playback) is appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you make during your performance. Since the accompaniment pattern plays back repeatedly in a loop. refer to the section “Rules when recording non-rhythm channels” (see below). The chord which forms the basis for this note conversion is called the Source Chord. Keep in mind that when you change the Source Chord from the default CM7 to another chord. G. D. 2) To delete a speciﬁc instrument sound. E. R = Recommended notes
Changing the Source Chord If you want to record the pattern with a Source Chord other than CM7. For information on recording to channels other than the rhythm channels (RHY1. and B). E.. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data. you can record individual sounds one by one. Playback of the speciﬁed section starts.e.
Using.

This Step Recording procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording (page 115). You can switch between the two types of lists by pressing the [F] button. you can record notes with absolutely precise timing. This is because the length of the Style is automatically ﬁxed. Chord and Lyrics data are not available.Style Creator
Step Recording (EDIT)
The explanation here applies when selecting the EDIT tab in step 4 of “Realtime Recording” (page 112). the End Mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure. with the exception of the points listed below: • In the Song Creator. they cannot be changed in the Style Creator. depending on the selected section. it cannot be changed. For example. however. only the channel data can be entered and the System Exclusive messages can be edited. if you create a Style based on a section of four measures length. and cannot be changed in the Step Recording display. in the Style Creator. the End Mark position can be changed freely. • In the Style Creator.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
115
. Select the recording channel in the BASIC tab display.
F
G
H
I
J
Using. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
In the EDIT display. • Recording channels can be changed in the Song Creator 1–16 tab display.

The operation steps are the same as steps 1–4 in “Realtime recording” (page 112).Style Creator
Style Assembly (ASSEMBLY)
Style Assembly allows you to create a single Style by mixing the various patterns (channels) from existing internal Styles. Select the Style containing the pattern you want to replace in the Style Selection display. To return to the previous screen. press the [EXIT] button after selecting the Style.) on the panel. Select the desired channel for the section (chosen in step 4 above) by using the [4π†]/[5π†] (CHANNEL) buttons.etc. Repeat steps 3–5 above to replace the patterns of other channels. etc. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
Section display Indicates the channels that make up the section. Press the [J] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display. Call up the Style Selection display by pressing the same button again.
3
Select the channel for which you wish to replace the pattern by using the [A]–[D] and [F]–[I] buttons. Ending. Select the desired section of the newly imported Style (chosen in step 3 above) by using the [2π†]/[3π†] (SECTION) buttons.) for your new Style. select the ASSEMBLY tab. and save your data from the display (page 63). Main. Select the desired section (Intro.
You cannot select the INTRO 4/ ENDING 4 section directly from the panel. Call up the SECTION display by pressing one of the Section buttons ([INTRO]/[MAIN]/[ENDING].
4 5 6 7
CAUTION The recorded Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation (page 63).
Using. In step 4.
116
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Change the section as desired by using the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons and execute the operation by pressing the [8π] (OK) button. then call up the display for Style Assembly.
1 2
Select the basic Style.

you can decide how notes will be converted and sounded for the accompaniment when changing chords in the chord section of the keyboard. Press the TAB[√][®] button to select a tab.
Using. Call up the Style Creator/Edit display by pressing the [B] button. Use the [6π†]/[7π†] (PLAY TYPE) buttons in the Style Assembly display to select the playback method. • OFF Mutes the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. • ON Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. Step recording and/or Style Assembly.
5
Edit the selected Style. you can play back the Style and select the method of playback. • Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER) ➤ See page 121 For playback of your created Style. • SOLO Mutes all but the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display.
Editing the Created Style
You can edit the Style you’ve created by using Realtime recording. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
Basic Operation for Editing Styles
1 2 3 4
Select a Style to be edited. Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button. Any channels set to ON in the RECORD display on the BASIC page are played back simultaneously.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
117
. • Editing Data for each Channel (CHANNEL) ➤ See page 120 The editing features let you delete data as desired and apply quantize settings for each channel in the Style data. Any channels set to something other than OFF in the RECORD display on the BASIC page are played back simultaneously.Style Creator
Playing the Style During Style Assembly While you are assembling a Style. • Changing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE) ➤ See page 118 These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created Style.

you can execute the edition and this button changes to “UNDO.
1
1 3
Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (page 119).
118
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. After the operation is completed.” letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisﬁed with the Groove or Dynamics results. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the data. see page 119. Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 63). only the previous operation can be undone.Style Creator
Changing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE)
The explanation here applies when you select the GROOVE tab in step 4 of “Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 117).
3
4
CAUTION The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation (page 63).
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
4
E
J
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
Using. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data. The Undo function only has one level. For details on editable parameters.

The Dynamics settings are applied to each channel or all channels of the selected Style.
CHANNEL ACCENT TYPE STRENGTH EXPAND/COMP. Determines the type of accent applied—in other words.” the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd. when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12. Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes. “B” types produce medium effect. 5) determine which beats are to be affected.
BEAT CONVERTER
SWING
FINE
Using. 3. depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above.
BOOST/CUT
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
119
. while values below 100% reduce it. the stronger the effect. The higher the value. “A” types produce minimum effect. The numbered settings (2. Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats. Values above 100% boost the overall velocity. All beats up to the speciﬁed beat—but not including the ﬁrst beat—will be played early or delayed (for example. if “8 Beat” is selected. while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats.Style Creator
■ GROOVE This lets you add swing to the music or change the “feel” of the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing (clock) of the Style. the 2nd and 3rd beats. In other words. 4. Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range. In all cases. 4th. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
■ DYNAMICS This changes the velocity/volume (or accent) of certain notes in the Style playback. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of swing. and “C” types produce maximum effect. with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced. Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Actually changes the timing of the beats (speciﬁed in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value.
ORIGINAL BEAT Speciﬁes the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. which notes in the part(s) are emphasized with the Dynamics settings. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early. For example. Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. if “3” is selected). 6th. Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. if “12 Beat” is selected. Expands or compresses the range of velocity values. The Groove settings are applied to all channels of the selected Style. and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting. Selects the desired channel (part) to which Dynamics is to be applied. For example. while values lower than 100% compress it. if the speciﬁed ORIGINAL BEAT value is “8 Beat.” all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets.

DEST speciﬁes the ﬁrst measure of the destination location. you can execute the edition and this button changes to [UNDO].
QUANTIZE
VELOCITY CHANGE BAR COPY
BAR CLEAR REMOVE EVENT
120
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisﬁed with the results of the edit. This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the speciﬁed channel. C Eighth notes with swing C Sixteenth notes with swing Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the speciﬁed channel. with the exception of the two additional available parameters below. This function clears all data from the speciﬁed range of measures within the selected channel.
A
F
1 4
B
G
C
H
D
I
5
E
J
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
2
Using. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display. to which the data is to be copied. SOURCE speciﬁes the ﬁrst (TOP) and last (LAST) measures in the region to be copied. only the previous operation can be undone. see below. Use the [4π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the data.
Same as in the Song Creator (page 155). Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
Use the [1π†]/[2π†] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited.
1
Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (see below). Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 63). The Undo function only has one level. After the operation is completed. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data. The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display. For details on editable parameters.
3 4
5
CAUTION The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the save operation.Style Creator
Editing Data for Each Channel (CHANNEL)
The explanation here applies when you select the CHANNEL tab in step 4 of “Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 117). This function lets you remove speciﬁc events from the selected channel. according to the percentage speciﬁed here.

A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
4
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
121
. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
• Other Settings Using the parameters of this group. you can take advantage of the power of the SFF format and freely create your own Styles.g.Style Creator
Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER) Special Parameter Settings Based on Style File Format
Source Pattern SOURCE ROOT (Chord Root setting of a Source Pattern) SOURCE CHORD (Chord Type setting of a Source Pattern) Chord change via the chord section of the keybaord. By using the Style Creator.
Other Settings HIGH KEY (Upper limit of the octaves of the note transposing caused by the Chord Root change) NOTE LIMIT (Note range in which the note is sounded) RTR (Retrigger Rules that determine how notes held through chord changes will be handled)
Using. Note Transposition NTR (Note Transposition Rule applied to the Chord Root change) NTT (Note Transposition Table applied to the Chord Type change) The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment (Style playback) know-how into a single uniﬁed format.
1
1
Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (page 122). (This does not apply to the rhythm track.
Output
The explanation here applies when you select the PARAMETER tab in step 4 of “Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 117). The Style data is appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you make during your performance. For example. • Source Pattern There are a variety of possibilities for Style playback notes. This basic Style data that you create with the Style Creator is referred to as the “Source Pattern. you can ﬁne-tune how Style playback responds to the chords you play. Editing of Style File Format data is related only to note conversion. Editing the rhythm channels has no effect. The chart shown at left indicates the process by which the Style is played back. very low notes of a piccolo sound).” • Note Transposition This parameter group features two parameters that determine how the notes of the Source Pattern are to be converted in response to chord changes.) These parameters can be set via the Style Creator feature. the Note Limit parameter allows you to have the Voices of the Style sound as realistic as possible by shifting the pitch to an authentic range—ensuring that no notes sound outside the natural range of the actual instrument (e.. depending on the particular root note and chord type that are selected.

Style Creator
■ NTT (Note Transposition Table) This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a Major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings. this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord. Use this for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
HARMONIC MINOR 5th NATURAL MINOR
In addition to the Harmonic Minor transposition above. augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. the minor third and ﬂatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. when the on-bass chord is recognized by the instrument. this table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. In addition to the Melodic Minor transposition above. Use this for melody channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords.
NATURAL MINOR 5th DORIAN
DORIAN 5th
■ NTT BASS ON/OFF The channels for which this is set to ON will be played back by the bass root note. Other notes are not changed. this table lowers the third and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord. such as Intros and Endings. especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts. this table lowers the third. the minor third. Suitable for chord transposition. In addition to the Natural Minor transposition above. When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
123
. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord. augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.
MELODY CHORD
MELODIC MINOR
MELODIC MINOR 5th HARMONIC MINOR
Using. augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a Major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord. sixth and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. the minor third interval is raised by a semitone. ﬂatted sixth and ﬂatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord. the minor third and ﬂatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone.
BYPASS When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED. Other notes are not changed. In addition to the Dorian transposition above. Suitable for melody line transposition. the transposition table used does not do any note conversion. such as Intros and Endings. the table used only converts the root note. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord. augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source Pattern. When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS.

The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord. The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord. high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds). Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed down to the next lowest octave. that no notes outside the natural range are sounded (e.
124
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.g. The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord. you can ensure that the voices sound as realistic as possible—in other words.
Example—When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4. However. The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord.Style Creator
■ HIGH KEY This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord root change.”
Example—When the highest key is F.
STOP PITCH SHIFT PITCH SHIFT TO ROOT RETRIGGER RETRIGGER TO ROOT The notes stop sounding.. The actual notes that sound are automatically shifted to the set range. This setting is available only when the NTR parameter (page 122) is set to “Root Trans. Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles
■ RTR (Retrigger Rule) These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord changes. By judicious setting of this range. the octave of the new note remains the same.
Root changes Notes played
CM C3-E3-G3
C#M C#3-F3-G#3
FM F3-A3-C4
F#M F#2-A#2-C#3
■ NOTE LIMIT This sets the note range (highest and lowest notes) for voices recorded to the style channels.
Root changes Notes played
CM E3-G3-C4
C#M F3-G#3-C#4
FM F3-A3-C4 High Limit Low Limit
Using.

Any panel setup previously registered to the selected REGISTRATION MEMORY button (lamp lights in green or red) will be erased and replaced by the new settings.. CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
6
125
.Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups—Registration Memory
The Registration Memory function allows you to save (or “register”) virtually all panel settings to a Registration Memory button. effects. no data registered On (green). you can also select the items to be recalled or not..
1
Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups
2
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
4
When recalling registration setups. press the [I] (CANCEL) button... Deleting all eight current panel setups To delete all the eight current panel setups. Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons to register your settings. and then instantly recall your custom panel settings by pressing a single button.. already contain the panel setup data. The registered settings for eight Registration Memory buttons should be saved as a single Bank (ﬁle). by pressing the [8π†] button..data registered. To cancel the operation.. Register various panel setups to other buttons by repeating steps #1– #5.
About the lamp status: Off. but not currently selected On (red). and so on) as desired. Buttons that are lit in red or green...... Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY [MEMORY] button... Enter or remove the checkmark in the box of the item to determine whether the item should be registered or not. It is recommended that you select a button whose lamp is not lit in red or green.
Registering and Saving Custom Panel Setups
Registering Custom Panel Setups
1 2
Set up the panel controls (such as Voice..
3 4 5
Press the [2π†]–[7π†] buttons to select items. even if you selected all items when registering (page 127).. Only the items selected here will be registered.. Style. turn the [POWER] button ON while holding the B6 key (right-most B key on the keyboard). The display for selecting the items to be registered appears... Refer to the separate Data List for a list of parameters that can be registered with the Registration Memory function.data registered. and currently selected Deleting an unneeded panel setup See page 127..

Registration Memory data (Bank ﬁles) is compatible among the models CVP-309/ 307/305/303/301. Press the [6†] button to save the Bank ﬁle (page 63). BANK] button to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display.
Bank 4 Bank 3 Bank 2 Bank 1
1
Registration Memory data compatibility In general. effect. BANK] button to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display.
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
Recalling the Registered Panel Setups
Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups
About recalling setups from a SmartMedia card or ﬂoppy disk When recalling the setups including Song/Style ﬁle selection from a SmartMedia card or ﬂoppy disk. Select the desired parameter by using the [1π†]–[7π†] buttons.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls—in other words. the data may not be perfectly compatible. make sure that the appropriate SmartMedia card or ﬂoppy disk including the registered Song/Style is inserted into the card slot or ﬂoppy disk drive. instead of via Registration Memory. Music Finder.
2
Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a bank. However. One Touch Setting. Song or incoming MIDI data.Recalling the Registered Panel Setups
Saving the Registered Panel Setups
You can save all the eight registered panel setups as a single Registration Memory Bank ﬁle. Parameter Lock You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.
A
1
2
2 3
3
Press one of the green-lit numbered buttons ([1]–[8]) in the Registration Memory section.g.
Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST. then lock it with the [8π] (OK) button. Call up the Parameter Lock display ([FUNCTION] → [I] UTILITY → TAB [√] CONFIG 1 → [B] 3 PARAMETER LOCK). etc. split point. etc. depending on the speciﬁcations of each model..
126
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
1
Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST.

you may want to switch Voices or effect settings while keeping the same accompaniment Style.
Disabling Recall of Speciﬁc Items (Freeze Function)
Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you made with a single button press. Edit the panel setups. even when selecting other Registration Memory buttons.
1 2 3 4
Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST. [FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET → TAB [√]/[®] FREEZE
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
127
.
Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
Press the [8π] (UP) button to return to the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display. This is where the Freeze function comes in handy. It lets you maintain the settings of certain items and leave them unchanged.Recalling the Registered Panel Setups
Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup/Naming a Panel Setup
The panel setups can be deleted or named individually as desired. • Renaming a panel setup Press the [1†] button to rename a panel setup (page 66). BANK] button to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display.
The number above the ﬁle name corresponds to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a bank to be edited. For example. there may be times that you want certain items to remain the same. • Deleting a panel setup Press the [5†] button to delete a panel setup (page 65). Press the [8†] (EDIT) button to call up the REGISTRATION EDIT Display.
1
Call up the operation display. even when switching Registration Memory setups. However.

.. if you turn the power off without exiting from this display.. Use the [E] button to determine how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END)....” TOP ....... Use the [D] button to select the pedal for reversing through the sequence. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display.The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory Bank in the same folder....Recalling the Registered Panel Setups
CAUTION Settings in the REGISTRATION FREEZE display are automatically saved to the instrument when you exit from this display.
1 2
Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups
Select the desired Registration Memory bank to program a sequence (page 126). Call up the operation display. there may be times during a performance when you want to quickly switch between settings—without having to take your hands from the keyboard. However....
Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order—Registration Sequence
As convenient as the Registration Memory buttons are........... The numbers shown at the lower part of the display correspond to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons on the panel.. Program the Sequence order from left to right. Program the Sequence order. by simply using the TAB [√]/[®] buttons or the pedal as you play.... Enter checkmarks for the items to be “Frozen” (i. by pressing the [8π†] button.. STOP . NEXT BANK.. Use the [C] button to select the pedal for advancing through the sequence.. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the eight setups in any order you specify.. specify here how the pedal will be used—to advance or to reverse through the sequence. to remain unchanged). Press the [FREEZE] button on the panel to turn the Freeze function on......
2 3 4 5
Press the [2π†]–[7π†] buttons to select items. The sequence is “stopped....
4
5
128
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
....The sequence starts again at the beginning.e. [FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET → TAB [√]/[®] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE
3
If you intend to use a pedal to switch Registration Memory settings. the settings will be lost.....Pressing the TAB [®] button or the “advance” pedal has no effect...

Settings in the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE display are automatically saved to the instrument when you exit from this display. unless you’ve saved it with the Registration Memory Bank ﬁle. • Use the TAB [®] button to call up the Registration Memory numbers in the order of the sequence. letting you conﬁrm the currently selected number. you can use a pedal to select the Registration Memory numbers in order.
CAUTION
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main display and conﬁrm whether the Registration Memory numbers are called up according to the sequence programmed above.
1 2
Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST.
Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups
The Registration Sequence is indicated at the top right of the Main display.
Saving the Registration Sequence Settings
The settings for the Sequence order and how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END) are included as part of the Registration Memory Bank ﬁle. This cancels the currently selected Sequence number (the box indicator at the top right goes out). or use the TAB [√] button to call them up in reverse order. The pedal can be used for Registration Sequence no matter which display is called up (except for the display in step 3 above). The ﬁrst Sequence will be selected by pressing one of the TAB [√]/[®] buttons or by pressing the pedal. • Deleting the number Press the [7π†] (DELETE) button to delete the number at the cursor position. • Replacing the number Press the [5π†] (REPLACE) button to replace the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory number.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
129
.Recalling the Registered Panel Setups
Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] button on the panel. save the current Registration Memory Bank ﬁle.
6 7
Press the [F] button to turn the Registration Sequence function on. press the TAB [√] and [®] buttons simultaneously. if you turn the power off without exiting from this display. the settings will be lost. then press the [6π†] (INSERT) button to input the number.
CAUTION Keep in mind that all Registration Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory Banks. • Deleting all numbers Press the [8π†] (CLEAR) button to delete all numbers in the sequence. Press the [6†] button to save the Bank ﬁle (page 63). However. To store your newly programmed Registration Sequence. Returning to the ﬁrst Sequence in one action In the Main display. BANK] button to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display. • When pedal operation has been set in step 3. The TAB [√] [®] buttons can only be used for Registration Sequence when the Main display is called up.

..........
Commercially Available Song Data
Song data downloaded from the Yamaha Web site and commercially available Disk Songs are available when you connect the optional ﬂoppy disk drive to the instrument.................................... except for your own personal use.........page 52 Connecting a Microphone................................................................... page 41
Singing Along with Song playback (Karaoke) or Your Own Performance .....
Your Own Recorded Songs
These are Songs which you’ve recorded (page 41............................................Using............. page 53 Convenient Functions for Karaoke ....... be sure to read “Handling SmartMediaTM*Memory Cards” on page 22................................ Commercially available music data is subject to protection by copyright laws.................
Before using a SmartMedia card and the card slot.........)
Using.................................. page 137) and saved to the USER/CARD/USB display..... page 34 Playing Back Songs Before Practicing .................. Creating and Editing Songs
Before using a ﬂoppy disk and the disk slot...........
Preset Songs
Songs in the Song Selection PRESET display...................... Creating and Editing Songs
Reference to Quick Guide Pages
Practicing with the Preset Songs ...................................................................... page 53 Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Own Performance ...................... page 55
Compatible Song Types
The Clavinova can play back the following Song types....... page 40 Recording Your Performance...................................... See page 195 for information on the types of Song data that can be played on the instrument...... The CVP is compatible with the Song disks (ﬂoppy disks) that bear the following marks:
130
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
..... page 52 Singing with the Lyrics Display .. be sure to read “Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” on page 21...... page 38 Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function .. Copying commercially available data is strictly prohibited.... (USB is available when you connect an external storage device to the instrument such as a ﬂoppy disk drive...... page 34 One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps .................

there are several other convenient ways to start/ stop a Song. In addition. Creating and Editing Songs
Stopping Playback
Fade Out The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-outs when stopping the Song playback.
Starting Playback
Synchro Start You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard.
FADE IN TIME FADE OUT TIME FADE OUT HOLD TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in. While playback is stopped.”
■ Starting/Stopping a Song
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start Song playback. Set the Fade In/Out time The times of the fade-in and fade-out can be set independently. or go from maximum to minimum. and the Song playback starts automatically at the tempo you tapped. Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button at the beginning of the phrase you want to fade out. and press the SONG [STOP] button to stop.
Using. Fade In The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins when starting the Song playback. 1 Call up the operation display. To produce fade-ins. To cancel the Synchro Start function. • Tap function This useful function lets you press the TEMPO [TAP] button to tap out the tempo and automatically start the Song at that tapped speed. simultaneously press the SONG [STOP] and [PLAY/ PAUSE] buttons simultaneously. Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out. press the [FADE IN/OUT] button while playback is stopped and then press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
131
. or go from minimum to maximum. Simply tap (press/release) the button (four times for a 4/4 time signature) while the instrument is in Synchro Start standby mode.Operations for Song Playback
Operations for Song Playback
This section explains detailed operations and functions related to Song playback which are not covered in the “Quick Guide. simultaneously press the SONG [STOP] and [PLAY/PAUSE] buttons simultaneously once again. [FUNCTION] → [I] UTILITY → TAB [√] CONFIG 1 → [A] FADE IN/OUT/ HOLD TIME 2 Set the parameters related to the Fade In/Out by using the [3π†]–[5π†] buttons.

you can use the [FF] or [REW] buttons to navigate through the Phrase Marks in the Song.
132
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. The steps for specifying the Phrase Mark number are the same as in the steps 1–2 of the section “Moving back and forth (rewind and fast forward)” (see above).” When this is on. which speciﬁes a certain location (set of measures) in the Song. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button again and the Song will resume from the current position. regardless of whether the Song is stopped or playing back. Creating and Editing Songs
■ Repeat Playback/Chain Playback
1
The preset Songs in the “Follow Lights” folder contain the Guide settings. [FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING Set the parameters related to the Repeat Playback by using the [H]/[I] buttons.
Using.Operations for Song Playback
■ Top/Pause/Rewind/Fast Forward
Moving to the top position of the Song Press the SONG [STOP] button.
For Songs containing Phrase Mark
3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the pop-up window showing the current measure number (or Phrase Mark number). then stops. RANDOM Randomly and repeatedly plays back all Songs in the folder containing the current Song. Pausing the Song Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button during Song playback. These Songs are inappropriate for use with ALL or RANDOM repeat. you can set Repeat Playback to “ON” or “OFF.
REPEAT MODE OFF Plays through the selected Song. 2 Press the SONG [REW] or SONG [FF] button to move back and forth (rewind and fast forward). ALL Continues playback through all the Songs in the folder containing the current Song repeatedly.
For Songs not containing Phrase Marks
Phrase Mark: Phrase Mark is a pre-programmed marker in certain Song data. press the [E] button and select “BAR” in the window showing the Song position. SINGLE Plays through the selected Song repeatedly. For Songs containing Phrase Marks.
Call up the operation display. The available parameters are shown below. the part corresponding to the speciﬁed Phrase Mark number is repeatedly played back. Moving back and forth (rewind and fast forward) 1 Pressing the SONG [FF] or SONG [REW] button automatically calls up a pop-up window showing the current measure number (or Phrase Mark number) in the Main display.
2
PHRASE MARK REPEAT For Songs containing Phrase Marks. If you don’t want to set the Song position by the phrase marks.

you can queue up the next Song for playback. certain settings related to the Song (such as voice selection.
Using.
Parameter Lock You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e. • Tempo for playing back a Song and a style at the same time When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time. Press the STYLE CONTROL [SYNC START] button to enable standby— letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you start playing. [FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING 2 Press the [7†]/[8†] (QUICK START) buttons to turn the Quick Start “OFF.g. The chord name is indicated in the Main display. split point. When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time. before the actual note data. the tempo value set in the Song is automatically used. Press the STYLE CONTROL [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment function. while a Song is playing back. channels 9–16 in the Song data are replaced with style channels—allowing you to play the accompaniment parts of the Song yourself. Try playing chords along with the Song playback as shown in the instructions below.. effect. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible. then automatically slows down to the appropriate tempo at the ﬁrst note. press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button. The “NEXT” indication appears at the upper right of the corresponding Song name.” 1 Call up the operation display. If you want to play from the beginning of the measure that has silence prior to the ﬁrst note. Select a Style (page 45). Creating and Editing Songs
When the Song playback is stopped.” a Song is played back directly from the ﬁrst note (which may be in the middle of a measure). etc. On some commercially available Song data. When Quick Start is set to “ON. turn Quick Start “OFF.
■ Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with the Song Playback
When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time. To cancel this setting. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. with a minimum pause for reading of data.Operations for Song Playback
■ Queuing the Next Playback Song
While a Song is playing back.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Select a Song (page 34).”
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
133
.” the instrument reads all initial non-note data of the Song at the highest possible speed. To return to the Main display. Play chords along with the Song. Select the Song you want play next in the Song Selection display. Playing Songs with the Quick Start function With the default settings.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 126). the style playback is also stopped at the same time. This is convenient for chaining it to the next Song smoothly during stage performance. etc. volume. When Quick Start is set to “ON.) are recorded to the ﬁrst measure. the Quick Start function is turned on. press the [8†] (Cancel) button. then press the [EXIT] button. we recommend that you use the Preset Songs in the “Sing-a-long” folder.

Below are two operation examples. Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display. (MIXING CONSOLE)
Reading Song data automatically when inserting a SmartMedia card You can have the instrument automatically call up the ﬁrst Song (not contained in a folder) on a SmartMedia card. The same operation will also be applied to other external storage devices. Make sure to checkmark the “VOICE” item in step 2 of the Setup procedure.
Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination.Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination. etc. Creating and Editing Songs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Select a Song (page 34). Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button repeatedly to call up the display of “SONG CH 1–8” or “SONG CH 9–16.” Adjust the volume balance of each channel by using the [1π†]– [8π†] buttons.
You can set the mixing-related parameters of a Song.
134
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Usually. Refer to the section “Adjustable items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE display” on page 84. etc. CH 1 is assigned to the [TRACK 1] button.” Press the [J] button to select the “VOLUME. You can save the volume settings to the Song in the Setup operation of the SETUP (page 156).
Adjusting the Volume Balance of Each Channel
Using. Select the [VOL/VOICE] tab by pressing the TAB [√][®] buttons. as soon as the card is inserted in the Card slot. (MIXING CONSOLE)
About the [SONG CH 1–8]/ [SONG CH 9–16] displays A Song consists of 16 separate channels. Separate settings can be made for each of the 16 channels in the MIXING CONSOLE display. and CH 3–16 are assigned to the [EXTRA TRACKS] button. 1 Call up the operation display. CH 2 is assigned to the [TRACK 2] button. Adjust the parameters in the SONG CH 1–8 or SONG CH 9–16 display respectively. respectively. Call up the “SONG CH 1–8” or “SONG CH 9–16” display in step 3 of the Basic Procedure in “Editing the Volume Balance and Voice Combination (MIXING CONSOLE)” on page 82. [FUNCTION] → [I] UTILITY → TAB [√]/[®] MEDIA 2 Press the [3π]/[4π](SONG AUTO OPEN) button to select “ON”.

Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice.
Turning the keyboard guide lamps off Press the [C] (GUIDE LAMP) button in the SONG SETTING display (in step 1 as described at left) to turn the keyboard guide lamps off. press the [GUIDE] button.
Using the Practice Function (Guide)
The keyboard guide lamps indicate the notes (location and timing) for you to play. the instrument automatically adjusts the timing of the Song playback to match your vocal performance. The following types are available. To use the practice function. Also. when you sing along with a Song playback using a connected microphone. You can save the changed Voice selection to the Song in the Setup operation (page 156). Press one of the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the channel. Creating and Editing Songs
Call up the setting display: [FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired Guide function type.
Selecting the Guide Function Type
1 2
Using.Using the Practice Function (Guide)
Changing Voices
1–4 5 6 7 8
The operation steps are the same as in the “Adjusting the Volume Balance of Each Channel” (see page 134). the Guide function will be automatically turned on and the related settings will be recalled when the Song is selected. Make sure to checkmark the “VOICE” item in step 2 of the Setup procedure. For Songs to which Guide settings have been saved.
Press the [H] button to select the “VOICE”.
2 1
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
135
.
Saving the Guide settings in the SONG SETTING display You can save the Guide settings as a part of the Song data (page 156).

. Song playback continues. Vocal CueTIME This function lets you practice singing with the proper pitch.... If the guide lamps do not light as intended.. indicating the notes you should play next. the keyboard guide lamps indicate which notes you should play (page 38).. Song playback pauses and waits for you to play any key. you can play the melody of a Song just by pressing a single key (any key is OK) in time with the rhythm.and left-hand channels to Track 1 and 2 respectively.. JUST. NEXT .... you may need to assign the appropriate right......... while you sing along..... Song playback pauses.. The guide lamps light slightly ahead of the music..... at the same timing you should play. by using the [1π†]/[2π†] buttons in the SONG SETTING display as described in step 1 on the previous page.... Song playback pauses.....
136
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
Using. Creating and Editing Songs
If the guide lamps do not light as intended The guide lamps light according to Song channels recorded to Track 1 and 2 and the chord data in the Song (when such data is included). waiting for you to sing. Simply play a key on the keyboard and the Song playback continues. Simply play a key on the keyboard in time with music (any key is OK) and the Song playback continues.. Determining the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps light (GUIDE LAMP TIMING) Press the [D] button in the SONG SETTING display in step 1 (page 135) to select the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps light.. Song playback pauses and waits for you to play.. When you sing with proper pitch. waiting for you to sing.
For Karaoke
Karao-key This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one ﬁnger.. When you play the correct notes. Any key With this function..... The guide lamps light in time with the music.. This is useful for singing to your own performance..Using the Practice Function (Guide)
For Keyboard Performance
Follow lights With this function.. The guide lamps ﬂash if you fail to play the keys with the correct timing.. Song playback continues.....

This is a non-realtime. and Step Recording which lets you enter notes one by one. To cancel solo playback. press the [CHANNEL ON/ OFF] button again. Style. in recording solo piano pieces. press the same button again.
The microphone input signal can not be recorded. and also to the [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] track.
This method lets you compose your performance by “writing” it down one event at a time. which can be used for recording at the same time. manual recording method – similar to writing music notation onto paper. CH 1 is assigned to [TRACK 1] button. You can independently turn each channel of the selected Song playback on or off. For example. Creating and Editing Songs
Recording Methods
There are three methods as shown below. chords and other events one by one (realtime performance is not needed). This lets you record a whole Song including several different instrument parts.3MB. If you want to play back only one particular channel (muting all other channels). This capacity applies to all ﬁle types.
Step Recording
Step Recording ➤ page 141
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
137
. Song. you can edit speciﬁc notes one by one. You can also edit the Songs you’ve recorded. or you can use the Punch In/ Out function to re-record a speciﬁc part.Recording Your Performance
Turning playback channels of the Song on and off A Song consists of 16 separate channels. press and hold down one of the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons corresponding to the desired channel. and Registration data ﬁles. You can record to the [TRACK 1 (R)] or [TRACK 2 (L)] button.
2 Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to turn each channel on or off. Usually. Record the performance of each instrument part one by one and create fully orchestrated compositions. and CH 3–16 are assigned to the [EXTRA TRACKS] button. You can input notes. Multi track Recording which lets you record several different parts to multiple channels. CH 2 is assigned to [TRACK 2] button. such as SmartMedia card) with your own performance. If the display shown below does not appear. Several different recording methods are available: Quick Recording which lets you record performance conveniently and quickly. to create the sound of a full band or orchestra. for example. 1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the Song CHANNEL ON/OFF display. such as a SmartMedia card.
Realtime Recording Quick Recording ➤ page 138
This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly record your performance—useful. You can also record over already-recorded parts of an existing Song (Preset Song or a Song on an external device.
Using.
Internal memory (User tab displays) capacity The internal memory capacity of the instrument is about 3.
Recording Your Performance
You can record your own performances and save them to the User tab display or a external storage devices.
Multi track Recording ➤ page 139
You can also edit Songs after they’ve been recorded (page 152). including Voice.

• Recording the RIGHT 2 and/or LEFT parts The [RIGHT 2] and/or [LEFT] keyboard parts should be turned on. 2 Set the tempo for recording by pressing the TEMPO [–] [+] buttons.
REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE
2
The RIGHT 2 and/or LEFT parts are recorded onto separate tracks. as necessary.
1
Press the SONG [REC] and SONG [STOP] buttons simultaneously. press the SONG TRACK buttons to be recorded. Select the voice for each keyboard part (RIGHT 2.
REC
+
Using. • Using Registration Memory panel setups Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1–8] buttons. page 75). • Recording Styles 1 Select a Style (page 45). • Recording your performance and the Style playback simultaneously Press the SONG [TRACK 1 (R)]/[TRACK 2 (L)] buttons and the SONG[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button. and/or the SONG [TRACK 2 (L)] button for the left-hand part recording.
Make the desired panel settings for your keyboard performance. • Recording Styles Press the SONG [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button.
3
While holding the SONG [REC] button. LEFT) by calling up the Voice selection display (page 74.Recording Your Performance
Quick Recording
This lets you conveniently and quickly record your performance.
138
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. Below are some example settings you may want to try. Creating and Editing Songs
• Recording your performance Press the SONG [TRACK 1 (R)] button for the right-hand part recording.

one by one.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
139
. as necessary (page 45). To close the message. • For recording to [TRACK 1]/ [TRACK 2] recording. then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 63). RIGHT 2. follow the operations shown below. • For recording to [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLES)] recording. play in the left-hand (chord) section of the keyboard (page 104). Also be sure to turn the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button on. Press the SONG [PLAY/ PAUSE] button to play back the performance you just recorded.
6
Listen to your newly recorded performance. If you’ve selected the SONG [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLES)] button in step 3 above. There are several different ways you can start recording.
About Channels See page 141.
REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE
Example Recording the keyboard RIGHT 2 part to the channel 2 Press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 2] button to call up the Voice selection display.
REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE
When recording is ﬁnished. press the STYLE CONTROL [SYNC START] button. you can record data to each channel independently. See step 7 for instructions on saving your recording. • Starting by pressing the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button If you start recording in this way.
Using.
Multi Track Recording
A Song consists of 16 separate channels.Recording Your Performance
4
Start recording. a message prompting you to save the recorded performance data appears. Creating and Editing Songs
7
Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data. • Starting by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. Both Keyboard and Style parts can be recorded. • Starting by playing the keyboard If you’ve selected the SONG [TRACK 1(R)]/[TRACK 2 (L)] buttons in step 3 above. Select a Style for recording also. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. But the metronome sound is not recorded. then play in the chord section of the keyboard.
5
Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop recording. press the [EXIT] button. press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button during recording. press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. play in the right-hand section of the keyboard (page 73).
REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE
Pausing and restarting your recording To pause recording.
CAUTION
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 63). In this case the rhythm parts (channels) of the Style begin playing back and recording starts simultaneously.
Using the metronome You can record your performance while playing back the metronome (page 30). This is useful for starting a Song with a short one-or two-beat pick-up or lead-in. page 74. To restart recording. With this method. and/or LEFT) (page 31. page 75).
1
Press the SONG[REC] and SONG[STOP] buttons simultaneously. “empty” data is recorded until you play a note on the keyboard. and select a Voice for the RIGHT 2 part. Select Voices for recording the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1.

6
Listen to your newly recorded performance. press the [2π] button to set the channel 2 to “REC”. this records data only over the set MIDI channel— meaning the external device must also be set to the same channel. For instructions on saving Song data. a message appears prompting you to save the recorded performance appears. Bass. and the Styles should be recorded to channels 9–16.
4 5
Start recording. Keep in mind that the metronome sound is not recorded.
Pausing and restarting your recording See page 139. press the SONG [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button.
REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE
7
To record another channel. To cancel the channel selection.
REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE
Recording each channel with the same tempo Use the Metronome function (page 30) to record each channel with the same tempo.
Press the [D] button to select the “RIGHT2”. Default channel/part assignments are shown in the section “About Song channels” (page 141).)—is recorded to each of the channels selected in step 2. press the SONG [REC] button again. this lets you record without having to set the MIDI transmit channel on the external device. • Setting several channels to MIDI When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record. press the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to set the desired channels to “REC”. Creating and Editing Songs
When selecting the MIDI part • Setting a single channel to MIDI All incoming data received via any of the MIDI channels 1–16 is recorded.
While holding the SONG [REC] button. Normally.
When recording is ﬁnished. press the [EXIT] button. Press the SONG [PLAY/ PAUSE] button to playback the performance you just recorded. To close the message.Recording Your Performance
Setting all of the 9–16 channels to “REC” simultaneously While holding the SONG [REC] button. The method for starting is the same as in step 4 of Quick Recording (page 139). the keyboard parts should be recorded to channels 1–8.
A
B
3
C
D
E
REC
Using. etc. repeat steps 2 through 6. Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop recording. When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record. This determines which part—keyboard or Style (Rhythm 1/2. see step 8.
+
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
Use the [C]/[D] buttons to select the desired part for the channel to be recorded.
2
While holding the SONG [REC] button.
140
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.

.. organ.. This part is used for sustained instruments such as strings.........
Default Parts Keyboard Parts
Channels
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Keyboard parts
RHYTHM1 RHYTHM2 BASS CHORD1 CHORD2 PAD PHRASE1 PHRASE2
Style parts
RIGHT1
About keyboard parts There are three keyboard parts...... Normally.Recording Your Performance
8
Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data.. the RIGHT 1 part is assigned to each of the channels 1–8. each of the Style parts is assigned to the channels 9–16...
Basic Operations for Step Recording
1
Press the SONG[REC] and SONG[STOP] buttons simultaneously.... Usually one of the drum kits is used.... containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns... arpeggiated chords.
Using...... A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. Creating and Editing Songs
Step Recording
This method lets you record regular music data such as melodies and chords.. As the default... RHYTHM .. choir.... respectively as shown below.. BASS ... This is the basic part of the Style. This is the rhythmic chord backing.... commonly used with piano or guitar Voices.. the Style parts should be recorded to the channels 9–16. etc. CHORD .... RIGHT 2 and LEFT.. About Song channels Default channel/part assignments are shown below... RIGHT 1. and other extras that make the accompaniment more interesting... About Style parts As the default...
Channels
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CAUTION
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 63). PHRASE .
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
141
. then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 63).. This part is used for punchy brass stabs. The bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style.. PAD .. the keyboard parts should be recorded to the channels 1–8. Normally.

F3. E3. Creating and Editing Songs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
2 3 4 5
Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto. using three music score examples.
About the items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons See page 145. and A3 in order. it may not appear exactly the same as shown below.
Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display.Recording Your Performance
Recording Melodies
This section explains how to step-record notes. D3. Play the keys C3. Press the [6π†] button to select the quarter-note length. G3.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
143
.”
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
1 2 3
E
J
Using.
The explanations here apply to step 7 of the section “Basic Operations for Step Recording” on page 142.
1
Press the [G] button to select “
.
Example 1
Since the music score displayed on the instrument is generated from the recorded MIDI data.
3–5
1
2
6 7
* The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following operation step numbers. according to the notation example.” Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.

8
Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song. (Press the button once to select the rest value. then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 63).Recording Your Performance
6
Press the [6π†] button to enter a quarter-note rest. To enter the rest.
144
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. 1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons in the STEP RECORD display (page 142) to select the data you want to delete. use the [4π†]–[8π†] buttons.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
Play the C4 key.
REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE
8
9
9 10
Using. and once again to actually enter it. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display. Creating and Editing Songs
CAUTION
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 63). If you want. 2 Press the [J] (DELETE) button to delete the selected data. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data.
11
Deleting data Mistakenly entered notes can be deleted.) A rest having speciﬁed note length will be entered. you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner (page 152).
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered notes.

dotted and triplet.. Determines the note type to be entered.. The higher the velocity value.
[I] button . the higher the velocity value and the louder the sound..... Pressing the button alternately switches the note selectors (at the bottom of the display) among three basic note values: normal.. Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to be entered.Vel fff ff f mf mp p pp ppp
Velocity to be recorded
Actual velocity you play the keyboard with 127 111 95 79 63 47 31 15
About velocity Velocity is determined by how strongly you play the keyboard. Determines the gate time (note length) of the note to be entered.. The more strongly you play the keyboard...
[H] button ...... The velocity value can be speciﬁed within a range from 1 to 127............Recording Your Performance
About items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons in the Step Record display [G] button . Creating and Editing Songs
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
145
...
Using...
Items
Kbd..
Items
Normal Tenuto Staccato Staccatissimo Manual
Gate time to be recorded
80% 99% 40% 20%
The gate time (note length) can be set to any desired percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.. the louder the sound becomes.

press the [7π†] button.Recording Your Performance
Example 2
The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording” on page 142. Press the [5π†] button to select the half-note length. While holding F3 on the keyboard.
146
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
2–5
6–8
10–13 14–16
1
9
* The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the following operation step numbers.”
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
1 2 3
E
J
Using.
About the items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons See page 145. Press the [7π†] button to select the eighth-note length.
7
6 7
Press the [H] button to select the “Staccato”. Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display. Creating and Editing Songs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
2 3 4 5
Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.
1
Press the [G] button to select “
. keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on the keyboard while executing the operation.” Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.
In this example.

REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE REC STOP PLAY/ PAUSE
17
18
Using. Play the F3 key on the keyboard. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
147
.
CAUTION
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 63). F3.” Press the [5π†] button to select the dotted half-note length. Press the [6π†] button to select the quarter-note length. according to the notation example.” Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto. and A3 in order. You can also edit the Songs you’ve recorded as necessary (page 152). Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display. as speciﬁed in the example. Play the A3 key on the keyboard.Recording Your Performance
8
Play the keys E3. as speciﬁed in the example.” Press the [I] button to select “dotted. Creating and Editing Songs
18 19 20
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered notes. then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 63).
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Press the [G] button to select “ . Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song. Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.

Press the [7π†] button to select the eighth note. keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on the keyboard while executing the entire operations. Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display.
About the items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons See page 145.”
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
1 2
E
J
Using. While holding C3 key on the keyboard.Recording Your Performance
Example 3
The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording” on page 142. press the [7π†] button.
5
1–4 6
7
* The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the following operation step numbers. Do not release the C3 key yet.
In this example. Creating and Editing Songs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
2 3 4
Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.
7
148
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Keep holding it while executing the following steps.
1
Press the [H] button to select “Normal.

Keep holding them while executing the following steps.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
149
. E3 and G3 keys on the keyboard.
Using. Do not release the C3 and E3 keys yet. release the keys. Keep holding them while executing the following steps. E3. and successively press the [5π†] button. press the [7π†] button. Do not release the C3.
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 63).
CAUTION
Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data.
7
7
While holding the C3. After you press the [5π†] button.
7
6
While holding the C3. Creating and Editing Songs
7
5
8 9 10 11
Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song. press the [7π†] button. G3 and C4 keys on the keyboard. E3 and G3 keys yet. you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner (page 152). press the [7π†] button.Recording Your Performance
5
While holding the C3 and E3 keys on the keyboard. If you want. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered notes. then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 63).

Creating and Editing Songs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
G
2
2 3 4
Press the [5π†] button to select the half-note length. then press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION A] button.
1
MAIN A
4
BREAK
7
MAIN B
C
F
G
F
G7
C
2. These instructions show how to record chord changes using the Step Record function. and so on) one at a time with precise timing.
3 1
C
F
Using. Main. Press the STYLE CONTROL [BREAK] button. Play the chords C. The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording” on page 142. F and G in the chord section of the keyboard.
1
Make sure the STYLE CONTROL [AUTO FILL IN] button is set to OFF. 3
5.
6
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
G7
4
5
150
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.9
* The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following operation step numbers.Recording Your Performance
Recording Chords
You can record Chords and Sections (Intro. 6
8. Ending.

Creating and Editing Songs
Entering ﬁll-ins Turn the STYLE CONTROL [AUTO FILL IN] button to ON. Play the chord C in the chord section of the keyboard.
7 9
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Press the [4π†] button to select the whole-note length. Deleting data Mistakenly entered notes can be deleted (page 144). D)] pattern playback. If you want. Press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the input chord change data into the Song data. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered notes. and simply press one of the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION (A. you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner (page 152). C. (The appropriate ﬁll-in section plays and then automatically goes to the selected [MAIN VARIATION (A. Press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION B] button. then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 63). and G7 in the chord section of the keyboard. Play the chords F. D)] buttons.
Using. B. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data.)
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
151
. C.
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 63). B.Recording Your Performance
5 6 7
Press the [6π†] button to select the quarter-note length.
CAUTION
Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display.

................ page 160 This lets you change the Song name or lyrics events... page 154 This lets you edit the channel events....
4
152
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. page 153 This lets you re-record a speciﬁc section of a Song...
Basic Editing Operation
1 2
Select a Song for editing............ Select the appropriate tab by using the TAB [√][®] buttons and edit the Song..... page 157 This lets you change or delete the recorded notes or chords.... • Re-Recording a Speciﬁc Section —Punch In/Out (REC MODE) .... Multi Track Recording............................. or Step Recording.............. For example........................... • Editing Channel Events (CHANNEL) ......Recording Your Performance
Editing a Recorded Song
You can edit the Songs you’ve recorded with any recording method—Quick Recording............................. • Editing Lyrics (LYRICS). • Editing System Event (SYS/EX............ you can delete data or transpose notes by channel...............
2
A
3
B
C
D
E
3
Using........ Creating and Editing Songs
Press the [A] button to call up the SONG CREATOR display to record or edit Songs............) ..... • Editing Note or Chord Events (CHORD........ 1–16) . Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button. page 159 This lets you change the tempo or the time signature..

at which point recording stops and normal playback continues. While holding the SONG [REC] button. The Song plays back normally up to the beginning of the indicated Punch In measure.
PUNCH OUT AT
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
153
. although you will hear them play back normally to guide you in the Punch In/Out timing. Actual overwrite recording continues until the beginning of the speciﬁed Punch Out measure (set with the corresponding display button). press the desired track button. In this method. The Song position at which recording is stopped is regarded as the Punch Out point.
REC
+
3 4
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. The explanations here apply to the REC MODE display in step 4 of the “Basic Editing Operation” on page 152.
■ PUNCH IN settings
NORMAL Overwrite recording starts when pressing the SONG [PLAY/ PAUSE] button or when you play the keyboard in the Synchro Standby mode. Creating and Editing Songs
FIRST KEY ON PUNCH IN AT
■ PUNCH OUT settings
REPLACE ALL PUNCH OUT This deletes all data after the point at which recording is stopped. You can set the Punch In measure by pressing the [3π†] button. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data. Play the keyboard at the Punch In point and stop recording at the Punch Out point. This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped. You can specify the Punch In and Punch Out points as measure numbers beforehand for automatic operation. You can set the Punch Out measure by pressing the [6π†] buttons.
Using. use the Punch IN/OUT function. then starts overwrite recording at that point. then starts overwrite recording as soon as you play the keyboard. Keep in mind that the notes before and after the Punch In/Out points are not recorded over. This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped. only the data between the Punch In point and the Punch Out point is overwritten with the newly recorded data. or manually execute the Punch In/Out recording by using a Foot Pedal or simply by playing the keyboard.
1 2
Use the [1π†]–[6π†] buttons to determine the settings for rerecording (see below).
CAUTION
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 63). then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 63).Recording Your Performance
Re-Recording a Speciﬁc Section—Punch In/ Out (REC MODE)
When re-recording a speciﬁc section of an already-recorded Song. The Song plays back normally.

For information on the available parameters.You can press and release the sostenuto pedal as often as you want during playback. only the immediate operation can be undone. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation for the current display. Creating and Editing Songs
■ Pedal Punch In/Out settings When this is set to ON.
1 2 3
Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the Edit menu (page 155). you can use the sostenuto pedal to control the punch-in and punch-out points.
154
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. press the [REC] button at the end of measure 5. to punch in/out of overwrite recording. The Undo function only has one level.” letting you restore the original data if you are not satisﬁed with the Operation results. see page 155.
Previously recorded data Newly recorded data Deleted data
Using. while releasing the pedal stops recording (Punch Out). pressing (and holding) the sostenuto pedal instantly enables Punch In recording.
Editing Channel Events (CHANNEL)
The explanations here apply to the CHANNEL tab display in the step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 152. While a Song is playing back. this button changes to “UNDO.
PUNCH IN setting PUNCH OUT setting NORMAL REPLACE ALL NORMAL PUNCH OUT NORMAL PUNCH OUT AT=006 FIRST KEY ON REPLACE ALL FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT AT=006 PUNCH IN AT=003 REPLACE ALL PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT AT=006
Original data
1 2
*1
3
4
5
6
7
*2
8
Start overwrite recording
1 2
Stop recording
3 4 5
Start overwrite recording *1
1 2 3 4 5
Stop recording *2
6 7 8
Start overwrite recording *1
1 2 3 4 5
Stop overwrite recording/Play original data
6 7 8
Play back (Original data)
1 2
Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording
3 4 5
Stop recording *2
Play back (Original data)
1 2
Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording
3 4 5
Stop recording *2
6 7 8
Play back (Original data)
1 2
Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording
3 4 5
Stop overwrite recording/Play original data
6 7
*2
8
Play back (Original data) Start overwrite recording
1 2 3 4 5
Stop recording
Play back (Original data) Start overwrite recording
1 2 3 4 5
Stop recording *2
6 7 8
Play back (Original data) Start overwrite recording
1 2 3 4 5
Stop overwrite recording/Play original data
6 7 8
*1 To avoid overwriting measures 1-2. start recording from measure 3 *2 To stop recording. Note that the current function assignment of the sostenuto pedal is cancelled when the Pedal Punch In/Out function is set to ON. Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the data. After the operation (with the exception of the SETUP menu display) is completed. The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded.Recording Your Performance
Examples of re-recording with various Punch In/Out settings This instrument features several different ways you use the Punch In/Out function.

If a value less than 100% is selected. then press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation. Select the channel whose data to be deleted by using the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons. For example.Recording Your Performance
4
Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data.
CAUTION
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 63). Selects the quantize size (resolution). if you quantize by the straight eighth notes. For example. then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 63).
After eighth note quantization
Settings
quarter note
eighth note
sixteenth note
thirty-second note
sixteenth note + eighth note triplet*
quarter note triplet
eighth note triplet
sixteenth note triplet
eighth note + eighth note triplet*
sixteenth note + sixteenth triplet*
Using. both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly. STRENGTH Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. and your performance may have been slightly ahead of or behind the precise timing. Quantize is a convenient way of correcting for this. if you use the eighth note + eighth note triplet setting. you may not play it with absolute precision. if you record the musical phrase shown at right. notes will be moved toward the speciﬁed quantization beats according to the speciﬁed percentage. For example.
Quarter-note length Original data
Quantizing strength=100
Quantizing strength=50
■ Deleting the data of the speciﬁed channel (DELETE menu) You can delete the data of the speciﬁed channel in the Song. Creating and Editing Songs
The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient. all notes in the channel are quantized to straight eighth notes—completely eliminating any triplet feel.
About Quantize size (resolution) The Quantize size or resolution is the number of clocks per quarter note. you should use eighth note as the Quantize size. A setting of 100% produces exact timing. However.
■ QUANTIZE menu The Quantize function allows you to align the timing of all the notes in a channel.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
155
. you should set the Quantize size to the shortest note value in the channel. when the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are contained in the same channel. For optimum results. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human” feel in the recording. since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time. if eighth notes are the shortest in the channel.
CHANNEL SIZE Determines the channel in the Song to be quantized.

It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another. To display the channels 9–16 Press the [F] button to toggle between the two channel displays—Channels 1–8. Creating and Editing Songs
1 Call up the operation display.) Selects the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed.
SCORE SETTING GUIDE SETTING LYRICS SETTING MIC SETTING
3 Checkmark the selected item by pressing the [8π] button. and LEFT) and their on/off status.
DESTINATION
■ CHANNEL TRANSPOSE menu This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments.Recording Your Performance
■ Mixing (merging) the data of the speciﬁed two channels (MIX menu) This function lets you mix the data of the two channels and place the results in a different channel. there is a “COPY” setting that allows you to copy the data from Source 1 to the destination channel. Selects the channel (1–16) to be mixed. Panel settings recorded here are same as the ones memorized to the One Touch Setting. Records the settings of the Guide functions including the Guide ON/OFF setting. Transposing to the same value for all channels simultaneously While holding the [G] (ALL CH) button. 2. SETUP menu The current settings of the Mixing Console (page 82) displays and other panel settings can be recorded to the top position of the Song as the Setup data. If “COPY” is selected here. ■ Setup recording procedure
Using. (The original channel data is maintained. and Channels 9–16. This can be recorded at any point in a Song (the other items in this chart can be recorded only to the top position of the Song). The Mixing Console and panel settings recorded here are automatically recalled when the Song starts. Only note events in the selected channel are copied to the destination channel.
SOURCE 1 SOURCE 2 Selects the channel (1–16) to be mixed. All MIDI events in the selected channel are copied to the destination channel. the data from Source 1 is copied to the destination channel.
156
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
SONG KEYBOARD VOICE Records the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console. In addition to the values 1–16. Records the panel settings including the Voice selection of the keyboard parts (RIGHT1. [DIGITAL RECORDING] → [A] SONG CREATOR → TAB [√]/[®] CHANNEL → [B] SET UP 2 Use the [1π†]–[7π†] buttons to determine the settings to be automatically called up when the Song starts. press one of the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons. Records the settings in the Score display. Records the settings in the Lyrics display. Records the microphone and the Vocal Harmony settings in the Mixing Console display (page 82).

. 1–16)
The explanations here apply to the CHORD and 1–16 tab displays in step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 152.............. Edit the data..
CAUTION
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 63). 5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data.Recording Your Performance
4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the SETUP recording operation.. Creating and Editing Songs
When the CHORD tab display is selected.. To move the cursor up or down .. then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 63). To restore the original value.. To actually enter an edited value.. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data...
Editing Note or Chord Events (CHORD.. simply move the cursor away from the parameter..... press the [A]/[B] buttons... when you wish to have only the note events shown (page 159). The [DATA ENTRY] dial can also be used. for example.
Using.... press the [F] button to select the channel to be edited.. Move the cursor to the desired data..Use the [A]/[B] button.
Chord and Section data recorded with Realtime Recording cannot be indicated and edited on this display.... To move the cursor by Measure/Beat/Clock units . Editing each parameter of the data 1 Use the [D]/[E] buttons to select the parameter to be edited. To move the cursor to the top data ...
Selecting multiple lines of data While holding the [J] (MULTI SELECT) button......
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
157
... then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 63).
1 2
When the 1–16 tab display is selected. press the [8†] (CANCEL) button before move the cursor.Use the [1π†]– [3π†] buttons. press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the data into Song data......Press the [C] button. Editing the data line by line Use the [6π†]–[8π] buttons to cut/copy/paste/insert/delete the events.
3
4 5
Displaying speciﬁc types of event (FILTER) You can select the event types to be displayed in the [CHORD] and [1-16] tab displays. This is convenient....
CAUTION
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 63).. 2 Use the [4π†]/[5π†] buttons to edit the parameter value...

Using. chord type.(Aftertouch)
Event types shown on the CHORD tab display
Style Tempo Chord Sect OnOff CH. Ending) On/off status for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style Volume for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style Overall volume of the Accompaniment Style
158
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Break. This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played. Fill In. Includes the note number which corresponds to the key which was played.T. On the Clavinova. Data for changing the pitch of a Voice continuously. plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played. pan.Bnd (Pitch Bend) A. one clock is equal to 1/1920th of a quarter note.
Event types shown on the 1–16 tab display
Note The individual note of a Song.Recording Your Performance
About the events shown in the display
1 About Clock A unit of note resolution. Same as the indication at the lower left of the display. 3 Indicates the event values. on bass chord Accompaniment Style Section (Intro. etc.Vol S. 2 Indicates the event types (see below). Main. The Quantize size is the number of clocks per quarter note. MIDI program change number for selecting a Voice. Creating and Editing Songs
Ctrl (Control Change)
Prog (Program Change) P. and the gate time value (the length of a note). such as volume. ﬁlter and effect depth (edited via the Mixing Console described on page 82).Vol Style tempo chord root. 2 3
Example
001 : 1 : 1440
Beat Measure number (BAR) Clock
1 Indicates the location (position) of the corresponding event. Settings to control the Voice.

....... copy.
Using. Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here. Allows you to make various detailed changes to the XG parameters.Selects only NOTE/CHORD data... such as tempo and beat (time signature). It lets you determine which event types will be shown in the edit displays.. cut. however..Checkmarks for all event types.. Determines the key signature.
4
Pressing the [C]–[E] buttons calls up the respective Filter displays as shown below.. Displays the SMF meta events in the Song. This is where the Filter function comes in handy. Determines the time signature........ In other words......... Determines the tempo value...Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes........... [I] (NOTE/CHORD)...
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
159
. STYLE . and paste the data. Creating and Editing Songs
SysEx (System exclusive)
Meta (Meta Event)
Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data. which do not belong to a speciﬁc channel..... you can edit recorded System Exclusive events...
Editing System Exclusive Events (SYS/EX.....
CAUTION
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 63).
1 2 3
Press the [H] (FILTER) button in the edit displays....)
The explanations here apply to the [SYS/EX] tab display in step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 152. however.. From this display.Recording Your Performance
Displaying Speciﬁc Types of Events (FILTER)
In the edit displays various types of events are shown.. as well as the major/minor setting... The operations here are basically the same as those in the section “Editing Note or Chord Events” on page 157.. Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here... System Events
ScBar (Score Start Bar) Tempo Time (Time Signature) Key (Key Signature) XGPrm (XG Parameters) Determines the top measure of a Song.... Checkmark (show) or remove the checkmark for the selected item by using the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons. and paste the data....Call up the Control Change Filter display.. then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 63)... this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously unchecked and vice versa... for the music score shown on the display..Call up the Main Filter display.. you can delete.. CTRL CHG . [J] (INVERT) .... It may sometimes be difﬁcult to pinpoint the ones you want to edit.... Select the event type by using the [2π†]–[5π†] buttons. MAIN .. copy... Refer to the “MIDI Data Format” in the separate Data List booklet for details.. cut... Displays the System Exclusive data in the Song.. you can delete...Call up the Accompaniment Style Filter Display... Press the [EXIT] button to execute the settings.. [H](ALL ON) ....

The operations here are basically the same as in the section “Editing Note or Chord Events” on page 157. this event may delete the currently displayed lyrics and display the next set of lyrics. On some MIDI devices. Lyrics Events
Name Lyrics Control Codes Allows you to enter the Song name. Creating and Editing Songs
160
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. you can edit the recorded Lyrics events.
CAUTION
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 63). CR Enters a line break in the lyrics text.Recording Your Performance
Editing Lyrics (LYRICS)
The explanations here apply to the LYRICS tab display in step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 152. then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 63). Allows you to enter lyrics. LF Unavailable on the Clavinova.
Using. Operations are the same as in the section “Entering Characters” (page 66). 2 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data. From this display.
Inputting and Editing Lyrics 1 Use the [4π†]/[5π†](DATA ENTRY) buttons to call up the lyrics editing display.

Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters
This section explains brieﬂy how to create your own Vocal Harmony (page 54) types, and lists the detailed parameters for editing. Up to ten Vocal Harmony types can be created and saved.

Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Vocal Harmony type to be edited.

A

F

B

G

C

H

D

I

E

J

3

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

4

4 5

Press the [8†] (EDIT) button to call up the VOCAL HARMONY EDIT display. If you want to re-select the Vocal Harmony type, use the [1π†]/ [2π†] buttons. Or you can re-select the Vocal Harmony type by pressing the [8π†] (RETURN) button to return to the Vocal Harmony selection display.

A

F

B

G

C

H

D

I

8

E

J

Using a Microphone

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

5

6

7

6 7 8

Use the [3π†]–[5π†] buttons to select the parameter (page 163) you want to edit. Set the value of the parameter selected above. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Vocal Harmony type (page 63).

CAUTION The settings here will be lost if you change to another Vocal Harmony type or you turn the power off without executing the save operation.

162

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters

Editable Parameters in the VOCAL HARMONY EDIT Display
VOCODER TYPE Determines how the harmony notes are applied to the microphone sound when the Harmony mode (page 167) is set to “VOCODER.” Determines how the harmony notes are applied to the microphone sound when the Harmony mode (page 167) is set to “CHORDAL.” Determines whether the gender of the harmony sound is changed or not. Off The gender of the harmony sound is not changed. Auto The gender of the harmony sound is changed automatically. Determines whether and how the gender of the lead vocal sound (i.e., the direct microphone sound) will be changed. Please note that the number of harmony notes differs depending on the selected type. When set to Off, three harmony notes are produced. Other settings produce two harmony notes. Off No gender change occurs. Unison No gender change occurs. You can adjust the LEAD GENDER DEPTH below. Male The corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal. Female The corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal. Adjusts the degree of lead vocal gender change. This is available when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off. The higher the value, the more “feminine” the harmony voice becomes. The lower the value, the more “masculine” the voice. When “Correct” is selected, the pitch of the lead vocal is shifted in precise semitone steps. This parameter is only effective when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off. Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the speciﬁed number of semitones above the lead vocal pitch. Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the speciﬁed number of semitones below the lead vocal pitch. Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes higher than the UPPER GENDER THRESHOLD. The higher the value, the more “feminine” the harmony voice becomes. The lower the value, the more “masculine” the voice. Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes lower than the LOWER GENDER THRESHOLD. The higher the value, the more “feminine” the harmony voice becomes. The lower the value, the more “masculine” the voice. Sets the depth of vibrato applied to the harmony sound. Also affects the lead vocal sound when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off. Sets the speed of the vibrato effect. Also affects the lead vocal sound when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off. Speciﬁes the length of the delay before the vibrato effect begins when a note is produced. Higher values result in a longer delay.

CHORDAL TYPE

HARMONY GENDER TYPE

LEAD GENDER TYPE

LEAD GENDER DEPTH

LEAD PITCH CORRECTION

UPPER GENDER THRESHOLD LOWER GENDER THRESHOLD UPPER GENDER DEPTH

Using a Microphone

LOWER GENDER DEPTH

VIBRATO DEPTH

VIBRATO RATE

VIBRATO DELAY

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

163

Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound

HARMONY1/2/3 VOLUME HARMONY1/2/3 PAN

Sets the volume of the ﬁrst (lowest), second, and third (highest) harmony notes. Speciﬁes the stereo (pan) position of the ﬁrst (lowest), second, and third (highest) harmony notes. Random The stereo position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played. This is effective when the Harmony mode (page 167) is set to “VOCODER” or “CHORDAL.” L63>R – C – L<R63 A setting of L63>R pans the sound hard left, while C is at center, and L<R63 is at hard right. Detunes the ﬁrst (lowest), second, and third (highest) harmony notes by the speciﬁed number of cents. When this is set to “ON,” you can “play” the voices of the Clavinova with your voice. (The Clavinova tracks the pitch of your voice and converts it to note data for the tone generator. Keep in mind, however, that dynamic changes in your voice do not affect the volume of the tone generator.) Determines which of the Clavinova parts will be controlled by the lead vocal when the Pitch to Note parameter is “ON.”

Press the [I] (MIC SETTING) button to call up the MICROPHONE SETTING display.

164

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

• Hz Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band. the settings will be lost. Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to set the value. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the MICROPHONE SETTING display. • dB Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB. • SW (Switch) This turns the Noise Gate on or off.) to pass. (Threshold) This adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open.
3
A F B G
C
H
D
I
E
J
4 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4
8
5
4 5 6
Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select the item (parameter) (see below) to be adjusted. allowing the desired signal (vocal. However.Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound
3
Press the TAB [√] button to select the OVERALL SETTING tab display. etc. This effectively cuts off extraneous noise.
Adjustable Items (Parameters) in the OVERALL SETTING Tab Display
■ 3BAND EQ EQ (Equalizer) is a processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands. ■ NOISE GATE This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a speciﬁed level. • TH. MID and HIGH) digital equalizer function for the microphone sound.
CAUTION Settings in the OVERALL SETTING tab display are automatically saved to the instrument when you exit from the display. if you turn the power off without exiting from this display. The Clavinova features a high-grade three-band (LOW.
Using a Microphone
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
165
. which can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response.

when it is set to L63>H.
SONG CHANNEL MUTE/PLAY When set to “MUTE. H: Vocal Harmony). • TH. • RATIO This adjusts the compression ratio. Raising this value increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and decreases that of the lead vocal. This setting is linked to the HARMONY CH setting in the SONG SETTING display (page 135). note data (played from a song on the CVP or an external MIDI sequencer) contained on the corresponding channel is used to control the harmony. This lets you set the balance between the lead vocal (your own voice) and Vocal Harmony. (Threshold) This adjusts the input level at which compression begins to be applied. It effectively “compresses” the signal. When this is set to L<H63 (L: Lead Vocal. only the lead vocal is output.” the channel selected below (to control Harmony) is muted (turned off) during song playback. UPPER Notes played to the right of the split point control the harmony. OFF Keyboard control over harmony is turned off. OFF/Channels 1–16 When set to “OFF. making soft parts louder and loud parts softer.” song data control over harmony is turned off. This is especially useful for smoothing out vocals that have widely varying dynamics. ■ VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL The following parameters determine how the harmony is controlled.
KEYBOARD
Using a Microphone
• BAL. • VOCODER CONTROL The Vocal Harmony effect in Vocoder mode (page 167) is controlled by note data—the notes you play on the keyboard and/or the notes of the song data. When set to one of the values 1–16. • OUT This adjusts the ﬁnal output level.Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound
■ COMPRESSOR This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a speciﬁed level.
166
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. only the Vocal Harmony is output. • SW (Switch) This turns the Compressor on or off. This parameter lets you determine which notes are used to control the harmony. LOWER Notes played to the left of the split point control the harmony.

In all other cases.
OFF XF 1–16 Chords are not detected from the song data. The three modes are described below. which produce harmony in different ways. You can specify whether the Vocoder effect is controlled by your keyboard performance or by the Song data (page 166). chords played in the LEFT Voice section of the keyboard (with the [ACMP] turned off and the [LEFT] turned on).)
VOCODER
CHORDAL
• CHORD The following parameters determine which data in a recorded song is used for chord detection. the mode is set to VOCODER. The harmony notes are determined by the notes you play on the keyboard and/or song data. • VOLUME Adjusts the output volume of the microphone sound. Chords are detected from note data in the speciﬁed song channel. • MUTE When set to ON. and this parameter determines how the harmony is applied to your voice. the microphone sound is turned off. The harmony notes are determined by the following three types of chord: chords played in the chord section of the keyboard (with the [ACMP] turned on).
Using a Microphone
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
167
.Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound
• MODE All of the Vocal Harmony types fall into one of three modes.
■ MIC The following parameters determine how the microphone sound is controlled. and chords contained in song data for controlling the harmony. the mode is automatically set to CHORDAL. The harmony effect is dependent on the selected Vocal Harmony mode. Chords of XF format are used for the Vocal Harmony. (Not available if the song does not contain any chord data.
AUTO When the [ACMP ON/OFF] or [LEFT] is set to ON and if chord data exists in the song.

the settings will be lost. separate from the settings for your singing performance. However. if you turn the power off without exiting from this display.
3 4
A F B G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Using a Microphone
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
5
4 5 6
Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) (page 169) to be set.Talk Setting
Talk Setting
This function lets you have special settings for making announcements between songs.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 3
Press the [I] (MIC SETTING) button to call up the MICROPHONE SETTING display. Press the TAB [®] button to select the TALK SETTING tab display. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the MICROPHONE SETTING display.
1
Press the [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] button to call up the MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY display. Use the [1π†]–[7π†] buttons to set the value.
CAUTION Settings in the TALK SETTING tab display are automatically saved to the instrument when you exit from the display.
168
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.

This sets the depth of the reverb effects applied to the microphone sound. This sets the depth of the chorus effects applied to the microphone sound.Talk Setting
Adjustable Items (Parameters) in the TALK SETTING Tab Display
VOLUME PAN REVERB DEPTH CHORUS DEPTH This determines the output volume of the microphone sound.
Using a Microphone
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
169
.This determines the amount of attenuation to be applied to the TOR overall sound (excepting the microphone input)—allowing you to effectively adjust the balance between your voice and the overall instrument sound. This sets the stereo pan position of the microphone sound.
TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUA. DSP MIC ON/OFF DSP MIC TYPE DSP MIC DEPTH This turns the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound ON or OFF. This selects the type of DSP effect to be applied to the microphone sound. This sets the depth of the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound.

a computer and the instrument). depending on the contract with the provider. To use the Internet connection. optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.com/CVP-309GP CVP-309 http://music.
Connection example 2: Connecting by cable (using a modem with router)
ADSL modem Router capability LAN cable
Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet
LAN cable USB-LAN adapter Clavinova
Connection example 3: Wireless connection
Modem* Access point
Clavinova USB wireless LAN adapter * Here.
* Here.
LAN cable USB-LAN adapter Clavinova Some types of modems require an optional hub network for simultaneously connecting to several devices (such as computer.Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet
The special Clavinova website can be opened when directly connecting the Clavinova to the Internet. This section contains terms related to computers and online communications. check your contract or contact your provider. optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.
Connecting the Instrument to the Internet
You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL. refer to the Yamaha Clavinova website: CVP-309 grand piano type http://music. If there are some terms you are unfamiliar with. since no modem or router settings can be made from the instrument itself.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router. cable Internet. “modem” refers to an ADSL modem.).com/CVP-309 CVP-307 http://music. etc. etc. For speciﬁc instructions on connecting (as well as information on compatible LAN adapters. refer to the Internet Glossary (page 183). If in doubt.
170
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.yamaha.
You can purchase and download Song data and other types of data from the special Clavinova website by directly connecting the Clavinova to the Internet. you will ﬁrst need to subscribe to an Internet service or provider.yamaha. you may not be able to connect to two or more devices (for example.). “modem” refers to an ADSL modem. musical instrument. routers. This means you cannot connect with the Clavinova.yamaha. etc.com/CVP-307 Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connecting the instrument. Connection example 1: Connecting by cable (using a modem without router)
Modem* No router capability Router Cable type LAN cable
Depending on the Internet connection. optical ﬁber.

while the instrument is connected to the Internet. then the [EXIT] button. see page 172. press the [E] (INTERNET) button in the Main display.
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
To close the website display and return to the operation display of the instrument. among other things. press the [EXIT] button. a scroll bar appears at the right side of the display.
Operations in the Special Clavinova Website
Scrolling the Display
When the size of the web page is too large to be shown at one time in the browser display of the instrument.
Returning to the Main display You can conveniently return to the Main display from any other display by simply pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button. To access the site. Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to scroll through the display and view those parts of the page that are not shown. you can audition and purchase Song data.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
Entering characters For instructions on entering characters in the website.Accessing the Special Clavinova Website
Accessing the Special Clavinova Website
From the special Clavinova website.
Scroll bar
Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
171
.

for inputting a password or searching for data. You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the red highlight to the desired position. press the [6†]/[7π†]/[8†] buttons. see “Following Links” above). Use the [6†]/[7π†]/[8†] buttons to move the red highlight to the desired character. To select the link.
172
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
Entering Characters
This section explains how to enter characters within the website. it is shown as a button or in colored text. etc.
1
With the cursor at a ﬁeld for character entry (such as a password box. press the [ENTER] button to call up the character input display. or other ﬁeld.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
You can also select and call up links by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial and pressing the [ENTER] button. etc.Operations in the Special Clavinova Website
Following Links
When there is a link in the page. Press the [8π] (ENTER) button to actually call up the link destination.
2
A F B G C H
D
I
Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4 3
5
1
2 3
Select the desired character type by pressing the [A]/[B] buttons.

press the [4†] (RETURN) button to enter a line break.Operations in the Special Clavinova Website
4
Press the [8π] (ENTER) button to enter the characters. • To delete all characters at once. press the [5π] (DELETE) button. You can also press the panel [ENTER] button to enter the characters. 2 Use the [6π]/[7π†]/[8†] buttons to move the red highlight to the desired character.
5
Press the [1π†] (OK) button to actually enter the characters. Inserting a Character 1 Move the cursor to the desired position. To cancel the operation. 2 Press the [5†] (SPACE) button to enter a space.
Return to the Previous Web Page
To return to a previously selected web page. To return to the page selected before pressing the [1π†] (BACK) button. Use the same operation as in step 1 of “Deleting Characters” above. Deleting Characters • To delete the previous character. Entering a Line Break (Return) When selecting a text box that allows for several lines. • To delete a speciﬁc character: 1 Move the cursor to the character you wish to delete.
Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
173
. 3 Press the [8π] (ENTER) button to enter the character. 1-2 Press the [8π] (ENTER) button to move the cursor. press the [2π†] (CANCEL) button. press the [4π] (CLEAR) button. 2 Press the [5π](DELETE) button to delete the character. Use the same operation as in step 1 of “Deleting Characters” above. Entering a Space 1 Move the cursor to the desired position. press the [2π†] (FORWARD) button. 1-1 Use the [6†]/[7π†]/[8†] buttons to move the cursor to “√®” below the character box. press the [1π†] (BACK) button.

Download Destination The download destination depends on the use of storage media. 3 SSL indicator This is shown when the opened website uses SSL. from which you can select the downloaded data. and it indicates that data is encrypted before transmission. When this appears. press the [8π] (UP) button in the File Selection display. you cannot view any web pages. select “NO” When the File Selection display is open.
Purchasing and Downloading Data
You can purchase and download Song data (for playback on this instrument) and other types of data from the special Clavinova website. To return to the Internet display. a message appears asking you whether or not to open the File Selection display. Operation after purchase and download When downloading is completed.
174
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. as described below. use a SmartMedia with ID. Monitoring the Internet Connection Status The three icons at the bottom right of the Internet display indicate the current Internet connection status.Operations in the Special Clavinova Website
Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a Web Page
To refresh a web page (to make sure you have the latest version of the page. • When a SmartMedia card is inserted to the instrument during purchase: The downloaded data is saved in the “MyDownloads” folder in the Card tab display of the File Selection display. When downloading data to the SmartMedia card.
SSL: SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) is an industry-standard method for protecting web communications by using data encryption and other tools. For details on purchasing and downloading data. 2 Communication Status indicator These indicate that communication with the site is in progress.
2 Status bar 1 2 3
1 Ofﬂine indicator This is shown when the instrument is not connected to the Internet. To cancel loading of a page (if the page is taking too long to open). Select “YES” to call up the File Selection display. press the [3π†] (REFRESH) button. To close the folder and call up the next highest level folder. press the [4π†] (STOP) button. press the [8π] (UP) button to call up the next highest level folder. • When a SmartMedia card is not inserted to the instrument during purchase:
Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet
CAUTION The purchased data will be lost if you turn the power to the instrument off during download. or to try reloading). refer to the instructions on the site itself.

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
175
. The Bookmark display appears.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
Select the position of the new bookmark by pressing the [1π†] (UP/ DOWN) button. press the [7π†] (EXECUTE) button.Operations in the Special Clavinova Website
The downloaded data is saved in the “MyDownloads” folder in the User tab display of the File Selection display. showing a list of the currently saved bookmarks. To return to the browser. and set up a custom link so the page can be instantly called up in the future. press the [8π†] (CLOSE) button. The title of the currently selected web page is shown below the list. or press the [8π†] (CANCEL) button to cancel.
Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
4
4 5
To save the bookmark. Call up the display for registering bookmarks by pressing the [3π†] (ADD) button. To close the folder and call up the next highest level folder.
1 2
With the desired page currently selected. press the [6π] (BOOKMARK) button.
Saving Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages
You can “bookmark” the page you’re viewing. press the [8π] (UP) button in the File Selection display.

Pressing the [4π†] (CHANGE) button calls up the display for entering characters. 3 Add Used when saving a bookmark (page 175). then press the [6π†] (MOVE) button.Operations in the Special Clavinova Website
Editing Bookmarks From the Bookmark display. as well as delete unnecessary bookmarks from the list.
1 Select the bookmark you wish to move.
7 Close Closes the Bookmark display and returns to the browser display. 5 Delete Deletes the selected bookmark from the Bookmark list. 2 Jump Opens the web page of the selected bookmark. 3 Move the bookmark to the selected position by pressing the [7π†] (EXECUTE) button. see page 172. For details on entering characters. letting you select the new position for the bookmark. The lower part of the display changes.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 Cursor up/down Moves the selection position in the Bookmark list. 4 Changing names Changes the name of the selected bookmark.
Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
177
. 2 Select the intended position by pressing the [1π†] (UP/ DOWN) button. you can change the names and rearrange the order of your bookmarks. 6 Move Changes the order of the bookmarks.

178
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Press the [5†] (SETTING) button to call up the Internet Setting display. Press the TAB [√] button to select the BROWSER tab.” Use the [2π†]/[3π†] (EDIT) buttons to actually set the selected page as your new Home page. press the [7π†] (EXECUTE) button.
1 2 3
Open the page you wish to set as your new Home page.Operations in the Special Clavinova Website
Changing the Home Page
In the default condition. press the [8π†] (CANCEL) button. However.
3
F G
H
I
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
5
6
4 5 6
Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet
Press the [1†] (DOWN) button to select the setting “Set this page as Home. you can specify any desired page on the special Clavinova website to be the Home page. the top page of the special Clavinova website is automatically set to be the Home page for the browser. To cancel. To return to the browser.

Select the desired item by pressing the [1π†] (UP/DOWN) button.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
179
.Operations in the Special Clavinova Website
About the Internet Settings Display
From the Internet Settings display. you can make various settings related to the Internet connection. For some items. the Edit display may not be shown. To cancel. Press the [2π†] (UP/DOWN) button to select the setting or change the value.)
Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 6
6
To execute the setting.
Entering Characters When the character input display is opened.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
4
4 5
To call up the relevant Edit display. (Refer to “Entering Characters” on page 172. This can also be done by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. press the [2π†]/[3π†] (EDIT) button. press the [3†] (CANCEL) button. Press the TAB [√]/[®] buttons to select the desired display. and Others. but the setting or change may be executed. press the [3π] (ENTER) button. LAN. The Internet Settings display has four sub-displays: Browser. you can enter characters. Wireless LAN. including preferences for the menus and displays.
Basic Operation
1 2 3
Press the [5†] (SETTING) button to call up the Internet Setting display.

Make a written note of the settings here.Operations in the Special Clavinova Website
7
To actually apply all settings changed in the Internet Settings display. 5 Show images Image data and pictures in the web page are shown in the browser when this is set to on. These settings must be made when “Use DHCP” above is set to “OFF. If your router is compatible with DHCP. 2 Home Page Shows and allows editing of the web page which is set as the home page. Image data is not shown when this is set to off. select “ON. in case you have to enter them again. These settings must be made when “Use DHCP” above is set to “ON (set DNS manually)” or “OFF.
1
Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet
2 3
Use DHCP DNS server1 DNS server2 IP address Subnet mask Gateway
1 Use DHCP Determines whether or not DHCP is used.
Browser
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 Encode Selects the character code encoding for the browser. press the [8π†] (CANCEL) button.” 3 IP address/Subnet mask/Gateway These settings are available only when DHCP is not used. press the [7π†] (EXECUTE) button. When this is set to “ASCII. subnet mask. refer to “Changing the Home Page” on page 178.” 2 DNS server 1/DNS server 2 These determine the addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers.” the keys are in alphabetical order. The settings here are: IP address.”
180
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. To cancel. 7 Time zone This determines the time setting for the browser. and gateway server address.
LAN
Both the wired LAN and wireless LAN need to be set in this display. When this is set to “Alphabetical. 3 Set this page as Home For details. 4 Restore Default Home Restores the home page setting.” the keys are arranged as a conventional “QWERTY” keyboard. 6 Character entry keys This setting lets you select the character order of the virtual keyboard for entering characters.

See “Initializing Internet Settings” on page 182. When using a non-proxy server. port number and the host name for the nonproxy server.Operations in the Special Clavinova Website
Wireless LAN
For a wireless LAN setup. make sure to set both the LAN settings (page 180) and the Wireless LAN settings below.
Make a written note of the settings here. 3 Delete all bookmarks Deletes all saved bookmarks. These set the type and length of the encryption key. 3 Encryption Determines whether or not the data is encrypted. 2 Channel Determines the channel.
Others
1 2 3 4 5
1 Proxy server/Proxy port/Non-proxy server Determines the proxy server name.
Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
181
. 2 Delete cookies Deletes the contents of all saved cookies. enter a separator (comma) between each server name. 4 Initialize setup Restores all settings in the Internet Settings displays to their defaults. 5 Connection information Shows detailed information on the current connection. 4 WEP key type/WEP key length/WEP key These settings are available only when Encryption above is enabled. in case you have to enter them again
1 2 3 4
SSID Channel Encryption WEP key type WEP key length WEP key
1 SSID Determines the SSID setting. The settings here are only necessary when using a proxy server.

To delete the cookies or bookmarks. as explained here.
Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet
182
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.
Use the [2π†]/ [3π†] (EDIT) buttons to initialize the Internet settings. Internet settings must be initialized separately. including those related to Internet connection.Operations in the Special Clavinova Website
Initializing Internet Settings
The settings of the Internet function are not initialized when using the Initialize operation of the Clavinova. Initializing will reset to the default values not only the settings of the browser. use the appropriate operations in the OTHERS tab display (page 181). Press the [1π†] (UP/DOWN) button to select “Initialize. but also all settings you have made in the Internet Settings displays (except for the cookies and bookmarks). Delete cookies/bookmarks Cookies and bookmarks are still remain after executing the initialize operation above. Press the TAB [®] button to select the OTHERS tab.
1 2 3
Press the [5†] (SETTING) button to call up the Internet Settings display.”
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
4
4
Cookies contain personal information.

A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network. usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal network. In order to connect to the Internet. A complete URL usually starts with the characters “http://.” Refers to each individual page that makes up a website. This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network conﬁguration information can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulﬁll the requests itself. If not. A system which links different networks or systems. Short for Uniform Resource Locator. For this instrument.Glossary of Internet Terms
Glossary of Internet Terms
Broadband Browser Cookie An Internet connection technology/service (such as ADSL and optical ﬁber) that allows for high-speed. the internal clock of the computer is used to specify the valid time/date for cookies and SSL.
This is an identiﬁcation name for specifying a particular network over a wireless LAN connection. For example. A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless. and allow them to all access the Internet and share data. A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network. It converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line. For example. Short for Local Area Network. and vice versa. For this instrument. high-volume data communication. it forwards the request to the real server. providing access to ﬁles and services. a router is necessary when connecting several computers in a house or ofﬁce. this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single location (such as an ofﬁce or home) by means of a special cable. opens another web page.” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. a standard for setting the internal system clock of the computer over a network. A highlighted word. A system that translates names of computers connected to a network to their corresponding IP addresses. although some modems have a built-in router. a string of characters used to identify and link to speciﬁc websites and pages on the Internet. it is necessary to contract to a provider. A router is usually connected between a modem and a computer. For this instrument. A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the Internet. A huge network made up of networks.
Router
Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet
Server Site SSID SSL Subnet mask URL Web page Wireless LAN
Short for “website.com/” is referred to as the Yamaha site. The ﬁrst page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet. A communications business that offers Internet connection services. this refers to the display that shows the contents of the web pages. the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among computers. so you don’t have to re-enter the information each time you visit the site. This phrase is also used to mean the “front screen” or top page of a website. The function is similar to a preference ﬁle in a conventional computer program.
Short for Network Time Protocol. access. Transferring data over a network. button or icon within a web page that. a standard for transmitting conﬁdential data such as credit card numbers over the Internet. from a larger “host” system to a smaller “client” system’s hard drive or other local storage device—much like copying ﬁles from your hard disk drive to a ﬂoppy disk.
Provider Proxy
A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing information on the Internet. and to ﬁlter requests. A device for connecting multiple computer networks. when clicked. and indicating the device’s location on the network. Communication is possible only between terminals with matching SSID names. The software used to search for. and view web pages.
DHCP DNS Download
Gateway Home page Internet IP address LAN Link Modem NTP
A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer. in that it “remembers” certain information such as your user name and password. Short for Secure Sockets Layer. Proxy servers are used to improve performance and speed. A setting used to divide a large-scale network into several smaller networks. and makes possible data transfer and conversion despite differing communications standards. cable-free connection. the collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
183
. mobile phones and other devices. this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument.

189 P./LINE IN] jack)
By connecting a microphone to the [MIC. the signal input at the [AUX IN] jacks is output from the [AUX OUT] [AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED)] jacks. and may even damage both pieces of equipment. LINE
PHONES
3 Using External Audio Devices for playback and Recording ([AUX OUT] Jacks. These jacks are located on the underside jacks panel of the instrument. Connect the instrument’s AUX OUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks and the input jacks of a pair of powered speakers using appropriate audio cables. LINE] switch to “LINE. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. 185 P. The microphone or guitar sound connected to the instrument’s [MIC. For details. see page 17. electrical shock or damage to the components may occur.Using Your Instrument with Other Devices
CAUTION
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components. 185 CVP-307 P. 185
3
3
184
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. 189 78
3
3 Phone plug (standard) Audio cable
Input jack Phone plug (standard)
P. 189 P. see page 52. If you make this connection. [OPTICAL OUT] Jack)
You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the instrument’s sound or to a cassette tape recorder or a digital audio device for recording your performance./LINE IN] jack (standard 1/4" phone jack) located on the left underside of the instrument.”
CVP-309 P. 189 8 9
[AUX OUT] Jacks (Standard phone jacks of [L/L+R] and [R])
When these are connected. The instrument outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through the built-in speakers. Also.
OPTICAL OUT
Instrument
L/L+R R (LEVEL FIXED) L R
Powered speakers
AUX OUT
Using Your Instrument with Other Devices
5 P. ﬁrst turn on the power to the instrument. Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connection with a monaural device. make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0).
345 Connecting Audio & Video Devices
n
Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resistance. before turning any components on or off. 185
4 P. then to the external device. 186 6 P. you can use the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device. 189 78 P. turn off the power of all the components. Otherwise. make sure to set the [MIC.
2 Connecting a Microphone or Guitar ([MIC. Refer to the diagrams below and use audio cables for connection. [AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED)] Jacks. Do not route the output from the [AUX OUT] [AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED)] jacks to the [AUX IN] jacks.
CAUTION
When the instrument’s sound is output to an external device.
INPUT VOLUME
MIN MAX
MIC./LINE IN] jack) is output at the same time. These connections could result in a feedback loop that will make normal performance impossible. you can enjoy singing along with Song playback (KARAOKE) or with your own performance. Please note that when connecting devices of high output level.
2
1
1 Using Headphones
([PHONES] jacks)
Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks (standard 1/4" phone jacks) located on the leftward underside of the instrument. 189 8 9
5 P. LINE IN
MIC. 186 6
4 P. For instructions on connecting.

Connect the instrument’s AUX OUT [L]/[R] (LEVEL FIXED) jacks and the AUX IN jacks of an external audio system using appropriate audio cables.
OPTICAL OUT
4 Playing External Audio Devices with the Built-in Speakers ([AUX IN] Jacks)
The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks. allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the instrument’s speakers. regardless of the [MASTER VOLUME] control setting.
OPTICAL OUT
n
• Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connection with a monaural device. or recording the instrument’s sound to an external audio system.
Video out settings
Instrument
L/L+R R (LEVEL FIXED) L R
1
MD deck etc.) of an external synthesizer or the tone generator module and the instrument’s AUX IN [L/L+R]/[R] jacks using appropriate audio cables.
Using Your Instrument with Other Devices
2
AUX OUT
Optical digital input terminal Optical digital cable
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
185
.) Since digital transfer allows you record a clear.
5 Showing the Instrument’s Display Contents on a Separate TV Monitor
Connect the instrument to an external TV monitor. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. the sound is output to the external device at a ﬁxed level. noisefree signal with no degradation or distortion. The output level from the [OPTICAL OUT] terminal is ﬁxed and is unaffected by the master volume control on the instrument.
Call up the operation display. and you can have the current display contents or lyrics (for group sing-alongs and the like) displayed on the TV. • The instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] setting affects the input signal from the [AUX IN] jacks.1kHz) for highest sound quality.Connecting Audio & Video Devices
[AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED)] Jacks
(RCA pin jacks of [L]and [R])
When these are connected (with RCA pin plug. then to the instrument. see page 53.
[OPTICAL OUT] Terminal
This is used for optical output of digital audio (frequency: 44. [FUNCTION] → [G] VIDEO OUT Select the video equipment standard “NTSC” π or “PAL” by using the [1π†] button.
Instrument
L/L+R R
Synthesizer Tone generator
LINE OUT
Instrument
L/L+R R (LEVEL FIXED) L R
Stereo system
AUX IN
Phone plug (standard) Audio cable
AUX IN
Pin plug
AUX OUT
Pin plug Audio cable
Pin plug
CAUTION
When the sound of an external device is output to the instrument. ﬁrst turn on the power to the external device. you can record your favorite performances with the highest possible quality. Use an appropriate optical cable to connect this terminal to the optical digital input terminal of a minidisk (MD) recorder or CD recorder. Connect the output jacks (LINE OUT etc. Select the contents of the Video Out signal—the current display contents (LCD) or lyrics (LYRπ π ICS)—by using the [3π†]/[4π†] buttons. (Make sure the connectors of the cable match the terminals on both devices. For instructions on connecting. Use these when controlling volume with an external audio system. LEVEL FIXED).

connecting the Foot controller FC7 and assigning it the volume control function allows you to add expression to your performance by controlling the volume level of the notes you play. to which the function is to be assigned. For example.
n
When the Registration Sequence function (page 128) is enabled. the pedal has the same function as the panel STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.
Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the particular pedal you’ve connected to the instrument. you can start and stop the Style with your foot. (In this case.
1 2 3 4 5
Call up the operation display. regardless of the display that is called up on the instrument. use this setting to reverse the control. The following explanations cover the related operations and assignable functions (parameters). Check that the desired function is controllable with the pedal by actually pressing the pedal. Details on the parameters are given below. [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [√] PEDAL Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select one of the three pedals or the AUX-connected pedal. only the lyrics of the song are output via VIDEO OUT. Or by connecting the FC4 or FC5 footswitch and assigning it to the Style playback start/ stop function. while pressing a different make/brand of pedal may turn the function off. • Avoid looking at the television or video monitor for prolonged periods of time since doing so could damage your eyesight. For example. The available parameters differ depending on the function selected in step 3. π Use the [1π†] button to select the functions to be assigned to the pedal speciﬁed in step 2.
Foot Pedals
Set the polarity of the pedal
Footswitch FC4 (optional) Footswitch FC5 (optional) Foot Controller FC7 (optional)
CAUTION
Using Your Instrument with Other Devices
Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power is off. the three piano pedals installed to the instrument (Right. π π Use the [2π†]–[8π†] buttons to set the details of the selected functions. the settings here will be ignored. If necessary. use only the foot controller. Center and Left pedals) can also be assigned to various functions here.
Details on the pedal functions are listed here. Details on the pedal functions are listed below. For functions indicated with “ “.
Assigning Speciﬁc Functions to Each Foot Pedal
6 Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller ([AUX PEDAL] jack)
By connecting a Foot Controller or Footswitch to the [AUX PEDAL] jack. * proper operation cannot be done with a footswitch. pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on.
AUX PEDAL
In addition to the footswitch or foot controller.) The assignable functions are listed following the instructions below. Take frequent breaks and focus your eyes on distant objects to avoid eyestrain.Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller ([AUX PEDAL] jack)
n
• Set the NTSC or PAL to correspond to the standard used by your video equipment. • When LYRICS is selected as the contents of the Video Out signal. you can have convenient control over various user-assignable functions.
186
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Press the [I] (AUX PEDAL POLARITY) button to switch the polarity.

all subsequent notes will not sustain. you can turn to the next score page. Switches the HARMONY/ECHO Voice Effect on and off. the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. Same as the [INTRO I–III] buttons. Switches the VIBRATE SW parameter on and off when the VIBE VIBRATE effect type is selected. The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Pressing this pedal reduces the volume and changes the timbre of the notes you play. Same as the [TAP] button. While the song is stopped. When you press and hold the pedal. which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left. Same as the [ENDING/rit. which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right. While the pedal is pressed. Allows you to use a pedal to control the Soft effect. While the song is stopped. Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. The depth of the effect increases while pedal is pressed. Same as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. Same as the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Plays a ﬁll-in. Same as the [SYNC STOP] button. for example. the pitch changes. Switches the Vocal Harmony function on and off. Portamento Time can also be adjusted from the Mixing Console (page 84). Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. This makes it possible to sustain a chord. Allows if you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the pedal while holding the note(s).” the function does not work. Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button. This function is available only for the pedal connected to the instrument’s AUX PEDAL jack. Same as the [SYNC START] button. Switches Voice Effect DSP VARIATION on and off. The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 101). while other notes are played staccato. Switches the MIC SETTING Talk function on and off. Plays a ﬁll-in. Allows you to use a pedal to control the sustain.. This function does not affect certain Natural Voices. If the ﬁngering is set to “AI FULL KEYBOARD. Plays a break.
SOSTENUTO
SOFT
GLIDE PORTAMENTO
PITCH BEND* MODULATION* DSP VARIATION VIBE ROTOR ON/OFF HARMONY/ECHO VOCAL HARMONY TALK SCORE PAGE+ SCORE PAGE– SONG PLAY/PAUSE STYLE START/STOP TAP TEMPO SYNCHRO START SYNCHRO STOP INTRO1–3 MAIN A–D FILL DOWN FILL SELF FILL BREAK FILL UP ENDING1–3 FADE IN/OUT FINGERED/FING ON BASS BASS HOLD
Using Your Instrument with Other Devices
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
187
. Allows you to bend the pitch of notes up or down by using the pedal.Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller ([AUX PEDAL] jack)
Assignable Pedal Functions
VOLUME* SUSTAIN Allows you to use a foot controller to control the volume. This is effective only for certain appropriate Voices. which would not sound appropriately with this function. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style (i. the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed during Style playback. all notes played on the keyboard have a longer sustain. you can turn to the previous score page. a note is played while the preceding note is still held). I–III] buttons. Plays a ﬁll-in. However.e. Same as the [MAIN VARIATION A–D] buttons. and then returns to normal pitch when the pedal is released. When the pedal is pressed.

n The Sostenuto and Portament functions will not affect the Organ Flute Voices. When GLIDE is selected. LEFT.” “RIGHT 2” and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display. all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT above) are shown here. this determines whether the pitch change is raised or lowered. when the pedal is pressed. For example. Calls up the previous One Touch Setting. when the pedal is released. This determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal. RIGHT2 HALF PEDAL POINT* DEPTH UP/DOWN RANGE These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal. When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected. Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button. Calls up the next One Touch Setting. MIC.
ON SPEED OFF SPEED KIT PERCUSSION
Using Your Instrument with Other Devices
188
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal.” “RIGHT 1. Determines the depth of the pedal effect. When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal. RIGHT1. You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument.Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller ([AUX PEDAL] jack)
PERCUSSION RIGHT1 ON/OFF RIGHT2 ON/OFF LEFT ON/OFF OTS+ OTS–
The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4π†]–[8π†] buttons. all available drum kits are shown here. even they have been assigned to the Foot Pedals. Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] button.
SONG. if SUSTAIN is selected as the type. Same as the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button. You can specify how far down you should press on the pedal until the damper or soft effect (page 187) starts working. When GLIDE is selected. in semitones.
Adjustable Parameters for Each Function
The parameters below correspond to buttons [2π†]–[8π†]. this determines the range of the pitch change. and their availability depends on the selected control type. When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected. STYLE. Linked to the Mixing Console → Pitch Bend Range (page 84) setting. letting you select the particular drum kit used for the pedal. this determines the speed of the pitch change. this determines the speed of the pitch change. the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT.

.... refer to the following sections: • What is MIDI?.... Simply relays the MIDI messages received at MIDI IN. sleep.......... make the connection directly without passing through a USB hub. Keep in mind that you also need to install an appropriate USB MIDI driver. exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended......
CAUTION
Precautions when using the [USB TO HOST] terminal When connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal......... Then...... and take advantage of sophisticated computer music programs.. use a standard USB cable (having the USB logo) to connect the [USB TO HOST] terminal on the instrument to the USB terminal of the computer..Connecting external MIDI devices ([MIDI] terminals)/Connecting a Computer or USB Device
7 Connecting External MIDI Devices ([MIDI] Terminals)
Use the built-in [MIDI] terminals and standard MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices. You need to install a USB MIDI driver to connect the computer and the instrument..page 196
n
About the [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE] terminals There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument: [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE].. Take care not to confuse the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors.
n
Driver A driver is software that provides a data-transfer interface between the computer’s operating system and a connected hardware device.... • When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your computer.......
MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI THRU Receives MIDI messages from an external MIDI device. ... The instructions below explain how to connect and use the terminals.. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing data..page 192 • What You Can Do With MIDI. If the computer or the instrument freezes....page 195 • MIDI Settings ....) • While a USB device is connected to the instrument....
Instrument
USB cable
For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effectively use it............ you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: When turning the power of the instrument off then on again. rather than by MIDI.... and quit any open application software. install the USB MIDI driver....Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument....Quit any open application software on the computer. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument off or unplugging the USB cable to/from the instrument/ computer... standby). covering the two connections: connection to the [USB TO HOST] terminal and connection to the [MIDI] terminal. • Before connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. or when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.... Explanations on the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal follow in the next section. we recommend that you connect the computer and the instrument by USB. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song....
Using Your Instrument with Other Devices
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
189
...
n
If you are using a computer that has a USB interface. • For information on setting up your sequence software.... Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction. turn the power to the instrument off and restart the computer.
89 Connecting a Computer or USB Device
8 Connecting a Computer ([USB TO HOST] and [MIDI] Terminals)
By connecting a computer to the [USB TO HOST] or [MIDI] terminals..... .
n
• The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the USB connection is made... make sure to observe the following points... • Connecting to the [USB TO HOST] terminal When connecting the instrument to the computer via USB... you can transfer data between the instrument and the computer via MIDI.. also turns off the power to the instrument. refer to the owner’s manual of the relevant software......
This explanation is divided into two parts... Transmits MIDI messages generated by the instrument...

(The CVP309 has two terminals.) ■ By connecting the USB-type LAN adaptor. can be connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. as well as read data from the connected device..
Using Your Instrument with Other Devices
n
About the USB Tabs The tabs indicating the connected USB devices (USB 1. disconnect the hub from the instrument.) are automatically called up. If you have a MIDI interface built into your computer. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you purchase. USB 2.) The USB hub must be self-powered (with its own power source) and the power must be on. exit once from the selection display then return to the display (or press the Tab switch buttons [√] and [®] simultaneously from the selection display). etc.com/
n
CD-ROM drive Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument.
n
USB hub If you are connecting two or three devices at the same time (such as two USB storage devices and a LAN adaptor). The USB tabs (USB 1. Before purchasing USB storage devices. USB 2. and connect the [MIDI OUT] terminal of the instrument to the MIDI IN terminal of the interface. etc. Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction. ■ By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device with a standard USB cable. • Compatible USB storage devices Up to two USB storage devices.
Using USB Storage Devices
This type is used to connect the instrument to a USB storage device. Only one USB hub can be used. The following description generally explains about how to connect and use them.
1 2
Connect the USB storage device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal with a standard USB cable.
USB port or serial port (modem or printer terminal) MIDI cable [MIDI IN] terminal [MIDI OUT] terminal MIDI interface
Instrument
Computer
n
Make sure to use the appropriate MIDI interface for your computer. and allows you to save data you’ve created to the connected device.
190
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice.
9 Connecting to a USB-type LAN Adaptor and USB Storage Device (via the [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal)
There are two ways of using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal on the bottom panel of the instrument.
Instrument
[MIDI OUT] terminal
[MIDI IN] terminal
Computer with MIDI interface installed
The second connection possibility involves a separate.) may be displayed up to USB 20 for each device or partition. and connect the [MIDI OUT] terminal of the instrument to the MIDI IN terminal of the interface. (Even if you use a hub. The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB storage devices. allowing you to save ﬁles and play back music data from the devices. only a maximum of two USB storage devices can be used. Explanations on the [USB TO HOST] terminal can be found in the previous section.
MIDI cable [MIDI IN] [MIDI OUT] terminal terminal
n
About the [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE] terminals There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument: [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE].yamahaclavinova. connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the external interface to the [MIDI IN] terminal of the instrument. After that. (If necessary.) Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. such as a ﬂoppy disk drive. CD-ROM drive. as well as read data from the connected device. hard disk drive. you can save data you’ve created to the connected device. ﬂash memory reader/writer. use a USB hub. Take care not to confuse the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors.Connecting a Computer or USB Device
• Connection by [MIDI] terminals There are two ways to connect the instrument via MIDI to a computer. external MIDI interface connected to the computer via a USB port or a serial port (modem or printer terminal). Using standard MIDI cables. you can directly access special Internet websites for downloading music data (page 170). If an error message appears while using the USB hub. The numbers are not ﬁxed and may change according to the order in which the devices are connected and disconnected. use a USB hub device. then turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the USB hub. connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the computer interface to the [MIDI IN] terminal of the instrument. they cannot be used for saving data. please consult your Yamaha dealer. etc. or see the following web page: http://www.

Connecting a Computer or USB Device
n
Checking remaining memory on the USB storage device You can check this in the display called up by the following operation: [FUNCTION] → [I] UTILITY → TAB [√]/[®] MEDIA Select the device by using the [A]/[B] buttons in this display and press [F] (PROPERTY). Copy and Delete operations). Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.0 storage device with the instrument. However. CAUTION
The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. do NOT unplug the USB cable.
n
Though the instrument supports the USB 1. and do NOT turn the power off to either device. execute the Format operation (page 62).
Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and connect it to the computer Backing up data to a computer and organizing ﬁles/folders
To protect your data (write-protect):
To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. you can connect and use a USB 2. apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media.
Formatting USB storage media
When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted.
USB storage device Computer Instrument
n
Even with a computer connected to the [USB TO HOST] terminal and a USB storage device connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Simply reconnect the device as shown below.
Computer
USB storage device USB TO DEVICE terminal Instrument
CAUTION
Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device. or connecting/disconnecting the cable too often. you can copy the data to the hard disk of your computer. If you are saving data to the USB storage device.1 standard.
Backing up your data to a computer ■ Backing up the instrument data to a computer
Once you’ve saved data to a SmartMedia card or USB storage device. Proceed with caution.
Saves internal data to a SmartMedia card or USB storage device. do NOT remove the media from the device. If so.
Using Your Instrument with Other Devices
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
191
.1. you can also back up your created data that you’ve saved to a SmartMedia card inserted to the CARD slot. While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save. you cannot access the USB storage device from the computer via the instrument. a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. then archive and organize the ﬁles as desired. make sure to disable write-protect.
n
Though the example here shows the use of a connected USB storage device.

then connecting/inserting the media to the instrument. such as a grand piano and a classical guitar. let’s ﬁrst consider acoustic instruments. When you play back that CD on your audio system. To get a better idea of what MIDI does. you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. in an electronic instrument the sampling note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard. and this is recorded to CD. Based on playing information from the keyboard. Once you’ve copied the data. MIDI is a data transfer standard that allows easy and comprehensive control among electronic/digital music instruments and other devices. insert the card into the Card slot or connect the device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument. let’s examine what happens when we playback a recording.
Copying the ﬁles of the hard disk of the computer to the USB storage device
What is MIDI?
Put simply. With the piano. the actual acoustic sounds of the pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as audio data. Not only ﬁles created on the instrument itself but also Standard MIDI ﬁles and Style File-formatted Style ﬁles created on other devices can be copied to SmartMedia card or a USB storage device from the hard disk of the computer. and your speakers reproduce them. you can hear the actual piano performance.
Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic instrument (audio data) Recording Playback
Computer
USB storage device [USB TO DEVICE] terminal Instrument
Using Your Instrument with Other Devices
In the above example. and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. The piano itself is not necessary. and play back the data on the instrument.Connecting a Computer or USB Device/What is MIDI
Copying ﬁles from a computer hard disk to a USB storage device
Files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be transferred to the instrument by ﬁrst copying them to the storage media. This is called audio data.
192
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. With the guitar. you strike a key. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?
Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note production
Internal amp L
Tone generator (Electric circuit)
Internal amp R
Playing the key board
USB storage device Computer Instrument Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. to distinguish it from MIDI data. you’re hearing the actual sound (vibration in air) of the acoustic instrument.
Disconnect the USB storage device from the computer and connect it to the instrument Reading ﬁles on the USB storage device from the instrument
As shown in the illustration above. a solo piano recording). since the recording contains the actual sounds of the piano. a sampling note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. Now. When you play back a music CD (for example.

The tone generator of the Clavinova ﬁlls this function. Instead. etc. select MIDI channels. This is usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time. let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the Clavinova keyboard. Example Keyboard Data
n
In the case of digital instruments. The Clavinova can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data.
Using Your Instrument with Other Devices
Channel Messages
The Clavinova is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 MIDI channels (or reception of 32 channels for MIDI data reception when using the [USB] terminal). However.” “with which key.
Voice number (with what voice) Note number (with which key) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) Velocity (strength at which it was played)
01 (grand piano) 60 (C3) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) 120 (strong)
The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic example.
n
MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data: • The amount of data is much less.” Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF. by sending and receiving compatible Note. the relation of the sequencer and the tone generator is similar to that of the pianist and the piano—one plays the other. we can hear our piano performance played by another instrument. special recording equipment is needed. even to the point of changing voices and transforming the data.What is MIDI?
Recording and play back the performance of a digital instrument (MIDI data) Recording Playback
Tone Generator Sequencer
Controller (keyboard. Since digital instruments handle playback data and the actual sounds independently. we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the sounds. which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other.
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages.” “when was it pressed” and “when was it released. Program Change and various other types of MIDI data. the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what voice. for each of the 16 channels. • The data can be effectively and easily edited. voices and effects. the tone generator plays the stored sampled note. change parameter values and of course play the voices speciﬁed for the various parts. In order to record the audio performance on an acoustic piano.” “about how strong. MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface. such as playing the keyboard and selecting voices.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator.
Keyboard performance (MIDI data)
However.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
193
. a tone generator.
n
Even though it is a single musical instrument. The Clavinova can be controlled by incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone generator mode. this recording equipment is unnecessary. we also need a sound source to produce the audio. such as guitar or violin. Looked at in another way. your digital instrument—the Clavinova—allows you to both record and play back the data. and a sequencer. The recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer. the audio signals are sent through output jacks (such as [AUX OUT]) on the instrument. are processed and stored as MIDI data. or messages. Control Change.)
SmartMedia card SmartMedia card
Finally.
Tone generator Sequencer
Panel operations on the Clavinova. using a tone generator capable of accurately producing various instrument sounds—including that of a piano. For example. the Clavinova can be thought of as containing several electronic components: a controller. playing back the song data. since the Clavinova features a built-in sequencer that lets you record performance data. the player’s performance on the keyboard is captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). Using these numbers as a basis for sound generation. which eventually comes from your speakers. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note. The auto accompaniment Styles and Songs also consist of MIDI data. Here. Program Change.

What is MIDI?

Message Name Note ON/OFF

Clavinova Operation/Panel Setting Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a speciﬁc note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played. For selecting Voices (with control change bank select MSB/LSB settings) Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc.

Example: Recording a performance with the auto accompaniment (Style playback) sound of the Clavinova to an external sequencer

n
The performance data of all Songs and Styles is handled as MIDI data.

MIDI Channels MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1–16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable. Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a speciﬁc channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program.
Weather report
1 2

As you can see, it is essential to determine which data is to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting MIDI data (page 198). The Clavinova also allows you to determine how the received data is played back (page 199).

System Messages
This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. These include System Exclusive messages for transferring data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime messages for controlling the MIDI device.
Message Name Clavinova Operation/Panel Setting Effect type settings (Mixing Console), etc. Clock setting, Start/stop operation

NEWS

2 NEWS

System Exclusive Message Realtime Messages

MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a speciﬁc MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument.

The messages transmitted/received by the Clavinova are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart in the separate Data List.

MIDI Transmit channel 2

MIDI cable

MIDI Receive channel 2

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

n
The Clavinova’s keyboard and internal tone generator are also connected by MIDI. → LOCAL CONTROL (page 198)

For example, several parts or channels can be transmitted simultaneously, including the Style data (as shown below).

194

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

What You Can Do With MIDI

What You Can Do With MIDI
■ Record your performance data (1–16 channels) using the Clavinova’s auto accompaniment features on an external sequencer (or computer with sequencer software). After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then play it back on the Clavinova.
MIDI receive Instrument
MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN

● XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and openended expandability for the future. The Clavinova is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF ﬁle containing lyric data is played. (SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence ﬁles. The Clavinova is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song” data using SMF Format 0.) ● Style File The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single uniﬁed format.

MIDI transmit

Computer or Sequencer

When you want to use the Clavinova as an XG-compatible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive part for MIDI channels 1–16 to “SONG” in MIDI/USB 1 in MIDI Receive (page 199). ■ Controlling from an external MIDI keyboard
Instrument MIDI receive
MIDI IN MIDI OUT

Voice Allocation Format
With MIDI, Voices are assigned to speciﬁc numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.” Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback. The CVP309/307 is compatible with the following formats.
n
Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the speciﬁcations of the devices and particular data recording methods.

MIDI Data Compatibility
This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by CVP-309/307, and whether or not the CVP-309/307 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below.

● GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation formats. Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level 1, as is most commercially available software. ● GM System Level 2 “GM System Level 2” is a standard speciﬁcation that enhances the original “GM System Level 1” and improves Song data compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater voice selection, expanded voice parameters, and integrated effect processing. ● XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha speciﬁcally to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. Song data recorded on the CVP-309/307 using Voices in the XG category is XG-compatible.
Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

Sequence Formats
Song data is recorded and stored in a variety of different systems, referred to as “sequence formats.” Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the Song data matches that of the MIDI device. The CVP-309/307 is compatible with the following formats. ● SMF (Standard MIDI ﬁle) This is the most common sequence format. Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0. • The CVP-309/307 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1. • Song data recorded on the CVP-309/307 is automatically saved as SMF Format 0. ● ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. • The CVP-309/307 is compatible with ESEQ.

● DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. ● GS GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhancement of the GM speciﬁcally to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects.

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

195

MIDI Settings

MIDI Settings
In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. The Clavinova gives you a set of ten preprogrammed templates that let you instantly and easily reconﬁgure the instrument to match your particular MIDI application or external device. Also, you can edit the pre-programmed templates and save up to ten of your original templates to the USER display. You can then save all these original templates as a single ﬁle to SmartMedia card or other external USB storage devices, in the MIDI SETUP selection display (called up by pressing [FUNCTION] → [I] UTILITY → TAB [F] SYSTEM RESET).

When you’ve ﬁnished editing, press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIDI template selection display (PRESET or USER). Select the USER tab display to save the data by using the TAB [√]/[®] buttons (page 63).

Pre-Programmed MIDI Templates

2

To use the pre-programmed templates or to edit them Press the TAB [√] button to select the PRESET display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a MIDI template. To use the templates already saved to the USER display or to edit them Press the TAB [®] button to select the USER display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a MIDI template. † To edit a template, press the [8†] (EDIT) button to call up the MIDI display for editing. The individual parameters settings are shown for the selected template. Here you can edit each parameter.

3

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

196

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Settings

Template name All Parts KBD & STYLE

Description Transmits all parts including the keyboard parts (RIGHT1, 2,and LEFT), with the exception of Song parts. Basically the same as “All Parts” with the exception of how keyboard parts are managed. The right-hand parts are handled as “UPPER” instead of RIGHT 1 and 2 and the left-hand part is handled as “LOWER.” In this setting, the instrument functions as a “master” keyboard, playing and controlling one or more connected tone generators or other devices (such as a computer/ sequencer). All transmit channels are set to correspond to Song channels 1–16. This is used to play Song data with an external tone generator and to record Song data to an external sequencer. Playback (Song or Style) synchronizes with an external MIDI clock instead of the instrument’s internal clock. This template should be used when you wish to set the tempo on the MIDI device connected to the instrument. MIDI accordions allow you to transmit MIDI data and play connected tone generators from the keyboard and bass/chord buttons of the accordion. This template lets you play melodies from the keyboard and control Style playback on the instrument with the lefthand buttons. Basically the same as “MIDI Accord1” above, with the exception that the chord/bass notes you play with your left hand on the MIDI Accordion are recognized also as MIDI note events. MIDI pedal units allow you play connected tone generators with your feet (especially convenient for playing single note bass parts). This template lets you play/control the chord root in Style playback with a MIDI pedal unit. This template lets you play the bass part for Style playback by using a MIDI pedal unit. No MIDI signals are sent or received.

Master KBD

Song

Clock Ext

MIDI Accord 1

MIDI Accord 2

MIDI Pedal 1

MIDI Pedal 2 MIDI OFF

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

197

You can also determine the types of data to be sent. and you want to synchronize it to that device. etc. no MIDI clock or Start/Stop data is transmitted even if a Song or Style is played back. ● With the exception of the two parts below. allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect. ● TRANSMIT CLOCK Turns MIDI clock (F8) transmission on or off.
● RECEIVE TRANSPOSE Determines whether or not the instrument's transpose setting (page 55) is applied to the note events received by the instrument via MIDI. INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting when the CVP-309/307 is being used alone or as a master keyboard to control external devices. When Local Control is set to “ON. USB 1.g. and use the instrument keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator. or USB 2.
Using Your Instrument with Other Devices
198
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
.” in the Main display. the conﬁguration of the parts is the same as those already explained elsewhere in this manual. the Tempo is indicated as “Ext.” the keyboard of the instrument controls its own (local) internal tone generator. This determines which parts will be sent as MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent. • UPPER The keyboard part played on the right side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices (RIGHT1 and/ or 2).
■ MESSAGE SW
● SYS/EX.
Operation
Select the part to be transmitted and the channel via which the selected part will be transmitted. • LOWER The keyboard part played on the left side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices. In this case. to the CVP-309/307’s MIDI IN terminal). ● START/STOP Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect Song or Style playback.. this allows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the instrument’s internal voices. If you set Local to “OFF. This is not affected by the on/off status of the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.MIDI Settings
SYSTEM display
MIDI System Settings
The explanations here apply to the SYSTEM display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 196. and that it is properly transmitting a MIDI clock signal. set this parameter to the appropriate setting: MIDI. The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI System Exclusive messages on or off. MIDI computer. The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI System Exclusive messages generated by external equipment on or off.
■ Clock setting. If you are using the CVP-309/307 with an external sequencer. For example.
TRANSMIT display
■ LOCAL CONTROL
Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When set to OFF. root and type) on or off.
MIDI Transmit Settings
The explanations here apply to the TRANSMIT display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 196.” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the instrument’s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. USB 1 or USB 2).
● CLOCK Determines whether the CVP-309/307 is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device. ● CHORD SYS/EX. make sure that the external device is connected properly (e. or other MIDI device. When this is set for control by an external device (MIDI. The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment on or off.

.. These settings let you determine the bass note for Style playback. You can also determine the types of data to be received.... Normally.....
Using Your Instrument with Other Devices
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
199
....MIDI Settings
● Tx MONITOR The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) ﬂash brieﬂy whenever any data is transmitted on the channel(s)......... • Note (Note events)........
■ MIDI messages which can be transmitted or received (recognized)
The following MIDI messages can be set on the TRANSMIT/RECEIVE display.... etc...............page 158 • PB (Pitch Bend).........
n
About the protected Songs Write-protected Songs cannot be transmitted even if the proper Song channels 1–16 are set to be transmitted.. these parts are not used by the instrument itself.. This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channels the data will be received... ● The Clavinova can receive MIDI messages over 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) by USB connection.... The Clavinova can be used as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator by using these ﬁve parts in addition to the general parts (except for the microphone sound)...
Operation
Select the channel to be received and the part via which the selected channel will be received.page 158 • CC (CONTROL CHANGE) ...........
n
When different parts are assigned to the same transmit channel If the same transmit channel is assigned to several different parts........ effect. When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON....... the transmitted MIDI messages are merged to a single channel— resulting in unexpected sounds and possible glitches in the connected MIDI device......
n Parameter Lock
You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e...... ● Rx MONITOR The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) ﬂash brieﬂy whenever any data is received on the channel(s)............. The bass note will be detected regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or split point settings.page 158
■ MIDI transmission/reception via the USB terminal and MIDI terminals
The relationship between the [MIDI] terminals and the [USB] terminal which can be used for transmitting/ receiving 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) of the MIDI messages is as follows:
MIDI reception MIDI transmission [USB TO [MIDI OUT] jack HOST] jack
RECEIVE display
MIDI Receive Settings
[MIDI IN] jack
[USB TO HOST] jack
Port handling USB1 USB2
Merge
Merge
MIDI/USB1 01–16
USB2 01–16
MIDI/USB 01–16
The explanations here apply to the RECEIVE display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 196.................. the conﬁguration of the parts is the same as those already explained elsewhere in this manual.......
BASS display
Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Receive
The explanations here apply to the BASS display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 196........ based on the note messages received via MIDI....... The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the bass note of the chord of Style playback....page 158 • PC (PROGRAM CHANGE)..g.... • EXTRA PART 1–5 There are ﬁve parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data...........” the bass note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels.........) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 126)....... split point.
• KEYBOARD The received note messages control the Clavinova’s keyboard performance....page 158 • AT (Aftertouch).. ● With the exception of the two parts below.

The chords to be detected depend on the ﬁngering type. since that number system starts from “0. Use the All OFF item to set all channels to OFF. These settings let you determine the chord type for Style playback.” • For the GS Voices.MIDI Settings
Displaying the Voice Program Change Number
Determines whether or not the Voice bank and number are shown in the Voice selection display.
Using Your Instrument with Other Devices
200
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. The chord type will be detected regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or split point settings. You can set this in the display called up by the following operations: [FUNCTION] → [I] UTILITY →TAB [√]/[®] CONFIG 2. this feature is not available (the program change numbers are not shown). Switch the DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER menu ON and OFF.
n
• The numbers displayed here start from “1.
CHORD DETECT display
Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI Receive
The explanations here apply to the CHORD DETECT display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 196.” the chord type is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels. This is useful when you want to check which bank select MSB/LSB values and program change number you need to specify when selecting the Voice from an external MIDI device.
Operation
Select the channel and set the “ON/OFF” for that channel. The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the BASS display above. When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON. The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the notes for detecting chords in Style playback. based on the note messages received via MIDI.” Accordingly the actual MIDI program change numbers are one lower.

MID. . adding the appropriate extension. • The pedal cord plug is not connected. To remedy this. • Each pedal has been assigned to a different function. • This is because the Main display is loaded prior to loading of the image from the CD-ROM. no sound is heard.) may have been changed or deleted. Keys do not sound at the proper pitch. • Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the Clavinova. because the display is too bright (or dark). • The language settings have been changed. or. • You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony (page 213) of the CVP. • Adjust the brightness of the display (page 19).Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches. This is normal.” changing the tuning system of the keyboard. • This is normal and is a result of the Clavinova’s sampling system.
Files/Folders
Some characters of the ﬁle/folder name are garbled. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button to turn the function off. • This is normal. • The master volume may be set too low. • This may occur if a USB storage device has been installed to the instrument. • Make sure the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button is set to OFF. • Data ﬁles with names of more than 42 characters cannot be handled by the instrument. Installation of some USB storage device may result a long interval between turning the power on and appearance of the Main display. sostenuto and soft functions do not work for the relevant pedals. Not all simultaneously played notes sound. Set it to an appropriate level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. turn the power on after disconnecting the device. disabling the speaker output. Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 39). To avoid this. Some Voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the upper or lower registers.Some Voices have a looping sound. Noise is heard from the Clavinova’s speakers.) is not shown on the instrument itself. causes this type of pitch shift. muting the sound. The Main display does not appear even when turning the power on. then set it as the main background image (page 19). Manually rename the ﬁle. Some voices have a pitch limit which. • The ﬁle extension (. the earliest played notes will stop sounding. When the maximum polyphony is exceeded. • Headphones are connected.) Unplug the headphones. Rename the ﬁle. and SOFT (page 186). • The volume of the keyboard parts may be set too low. • All keyboard parts are set to off. copy the image data from the CD-ROM to the User display. A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. • Noise may be heard if a mobile phone is used near the Clavinova or if the phone is ringing. Securely insert the pedal cord plug into the proper jack (page 210). An existing ﬁle is not shown. when reached. The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than “Equal. • Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 103). Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 39). • Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. SOSTENUTO. Use the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1]/[RIGHT 2]/[LEFT] button to turn it on. • Make sure the Registration Sequence function is set to OFF (page 129).Troubleshooting
Overall
The Clavinova does not turn on. on a computer. letting the latest played notes sound. etc. etc. Make sure that each pedal is properly assigned to SUSTAIN. • Use the [LCD CONTRAST] knob to adjust for optimum visibility.There is a slight difference in sound quality among different notes played on the keyboard. The main background image from the CD-ROM is not displayed. The data contained in the external media (SmartMedia card. The letters in the display cannot be read. and the male plug into a proper AC outlet.
Appendix
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
201
. The overall volume is too low. Set the appropriate language for the ﬁle/folder name (page 18). Turn off the mobile phone. or use it further away from the Clavinova. • The [FADE IN/OUT] button is on. reducing the number of characters to 41 or less. • The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Make sure “Equal” is selected as the Scale in the Scale Tune display (page 78). . depending upon the voice. page 17. Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch.
Pedals
The damper. . • Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON (page 198). • Make sure the speaker setting is set to ON (page 17). (This happens when the speaker setting is set to “HEADPHONE SW”. The keyboard volume is lower than the Song/Style playback volume.

• Each Voice has its own suitable preset settings.
Appendix
202
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Turn off the RIGHT 2 part or change the Voice of one of the parts.) cannot be directly copied or pasted to another media. • This may be caused by certain effects. • To select the Voice for the right-hand key range.
The Harmony function does not operate. • When changing the rhythm/percussion Voices (drum kits. When a Voice is changed. even when replacing Voices. The Voice produces excessive noise. To select the Voice for the left-hand key range. Tremolo and Trill settings in the Harmony/Echo display are not effective for Organ Flute Voices. • Check whether or not the selected part is turned on (page 73). depending on the Harmonic Content and/or Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display (page 84). • Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters may not make much change in the actual sound depending on the original settings of the Voice.
Demo
How can I stop the demo? • Press the [EXIT] button. • (CVP-309 grand piano type) If you close the lid completely or to the shorter stay while performing the calibration. For the Voice to be layered in the right-hand range. Select an appropriate ﬁngering mode (page 101). Make sure all relevant volume settings are appropriate. which are automatically recalled when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 100). • This is normal. In the case of Song playback.) of the Style or Song from the Mixer. • This is normal. you can restore the original sound by returning to the beginning of the Song and playing back from that point. The sound of the Voice doesn’t change. etc. and in some cases you may be unable to restore the original sound. • Depending on the particular Song data. the calibration may abort and the settings may be reset to their default values. Tremolo/Trill cannot be applied to the Organ Flute Voice. • The speaker is turned off.
Voice
The Voice selected from the Voice Selection display does not sound. there are some instances where Song Auto Revoice has no effect.
Help
How can I leave the Help feature? • Press the [EXIT] button. even when editing the Voice. Adjust the Harmonic Content or Brightness controls in the Filter display (page 84). Perform the calibration once again after eliminating the noise. • Certain Voices may produce noise. The sound does not change when replacing Voices with the Song Auto Revoice feature. The sound is distorted or noisy. the previously selected effect is changed. • This is normal.” and both parts are set to play the same Voice. press the PART SELECT [LEFT] button. Voices other than those in the Preset display cannot be selected for Step recording. • The volume may be turned up too high. A strange “ﬂanging” or “doubling” sound occurs.The ﬁle/folder copied or cut from one media (such as a SmartMedia card. • Noise may occur depending on the settings made in the Filter display of the Mixing Console. The sound seems strange or different than expected when changing a rhythm Voice (drum kit. Since directly copying data is not possible. • The RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 parts are set to “ON. press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 2] button. • Some ﬁlter resonance settings in the Sound Creator display (page 95) can result in distorted sound. especially distortion-type effects (page 86). etc. the detailed settings related to the drum voice are reset. Try canceling all unnecessary effects. press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 1] button. Adjust these settings if necessary. • Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard ﬁngering modes. In the case of Style play. copy or paste the data once to the User display.) of the Style and Song from the VOICE parameter. the calibration will be aborted. Perform the calibration once again after opening the lid with the longer stay. you can restore the original sound by selecting the same Style again. etc. then copy or paste it again to the Card/USB display after changing the media. • If any low-range noise (such as an air conditioner or trafﬁc) is audible around the Clavinova during the calibration.
iAFC
Calibration is aborted. The sound is slightly different each time the keys are played. Perform the calibration once again after turning the speaker on (page 17).

The channels BASS-PHR2 cannot be edited in Channel Edit. even with the Preset Voice shown. • If the size of the Style data is large (120 KB or greater). Make sure to play keys in the chord range of the keyboard. the Clavinova selects the Preset voice (on which the User/ Card Voice is based). Only the rhythm channel plays. BASS-PHR2 channels of the Preset Styles cannot be edited. • You may be playing the keys according to a different ﬁngering mode. If desired. • Make sure to press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. When a User/Card Voice is saved to the User/Card drive. the On/Off setting of the Left Part does not change even when changing the Registration Memory setting. When using the Freeze function of the Registration Memory. the Song/Style cannot be called up. • The Left Part On/Off setting is included in the Style group.” If either of these is selected. • MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL. • This is normal. Starting a Song while playing back a Style stops Style playback. • Set the Song to Synchro Start standby. and play the keys according to the selected mode (page 102). The two ways shown below let you play back a Style and Song simultaneously. the newly selected Style doesn’t play at the proper Tempo. When playing back one Style and selecting another.
Registration memory
The Song/Style registered to the Registration Memory cannot be called up. the actual sounding Voice is the selected User/Card Voice. the File Selection display shows a Preset Voice. irrespective of the split point setting. • Start the Style playback after playing back a Song. Select the appropriate bank (page 126). Check the accompaniment mode. chords are recognized over the entire range of the keyboard.Style
Style playback does not start. and not the one currently selected. This is because Song playback has priority. • You may be playing keys in the right hand range of the keyboard. • The bank containing the Registration has not been selected. • You may not be playing the correct keys for indicating the chord. • This is normal if the ﬁngering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard. select a different ﬁngering mode (page 102). The order for calling up Registration Memory settings is not shown on the Registration Sequence setting display. The “Off” setting is not shown for the Play Type parameter in the Assembly (Style Creator) feature. • Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on. then start the Style. • The selected section is set to record enable. and 2) the parameter settings as set in the Sound Creator. the actual data is divided into two separate types: 1) the source Preset Voice itself. • If the registered Song/Style is contained on external media such as SmartMedia card and the media is not inserted or connected to the instrument. Remove the checkmark from “STYLE” in the Freeze setting display (page 127).” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL” (page 198). Release the recording assignment by pressing the appropriate [1†]– [8†] button in the recording channel display (TAB [√] button → BASIC tab → [F] REC CH).
The level balance of the various Parts becomes wrong or unexpected sounds are output when selecting a Style or a Voice after selecting a Song. • The level balance of the Parts can change and unexpected sounds can be produced because of the effects applied to each Part. The desired chord is not recognized or output by the auto accompaniment. Make sure the ﬁngering mode is set to something besides “Full Keyboard” or “Al Full Keyboard” and set Style On/Off to on. then applies the relevant parameter settings to it—so that your original User/Card Voice is sounded. press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.” or when Style On/Off is set to off. Even though a Registration Memory setting containing a User/Card voice is selected. • This is normal. the Tempo setting remains constant when changing Styles. Insert or connect the appropriate media containing the Song/Style data. Refer to “Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode” of the separate Data List. Synchro Stop cannot be turned on. • Synchro Stop cannot be turned on when the ﬁngering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard. When you recall a Registration Memory setting containing a User/Card Voice. • This is normal.
Appendix
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
203
. Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regardless of the split point or where chords are played on the keyboard. Styles cannot be selected. the Style cannot be selected because the data is too large to be ready by the instrument.

Song
Songs cannot be selected. • This may be because the language settings have been changed. Set the appropriate language for the Song ﬁle name. • If the size of the Song data is large (300 KB or greater), the Song cannot be selected because the data is too large to be read by the instrument. Song playback does not start. • “New Song” (a blank Song) has been selected. Make sure to select an appropriate Song in the Song Selection display (page 34). • Make sure to press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. • The Song has been stopped at the end of the Song data. Return to the beginning of the Song by pressing the SONG [STOP] button. • In the case a Song to which write-protect has been applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song name), the original ﬁle may not be in the same folder. It cannot be played back unless the original ﬁle (showing “Prot.2 Orig” at the upper left of the Song name) is in the same folder. • In case of a Song to which write-protect has been applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song name), the original ﬁle name may have been changed. Rename the ﬁle with the original ﬁle name (so that “Prot.2 Orig” is shown at the upper left of the Song name). • In case of a Song to which write-protect has been applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song name), the ﬁle icon may have been changed. Songs to which write-protect has been applied cannot be played back when the ﬁle icon of the original has been changed. • MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL” (page 198). Song playback stops before the Song is ﬁnished. • The Guide function is turned on. (In this case, playback is “waiting” for the correct key to be played.) Press the [GUIDE] button to turn off the guide function. The Song last selected before turning off the power is no longer available. • If the Song last selected before turning off the power is contained in external media such as a SmartMedia card, you’ll need to reinsert/reconnect the same media to call up the Song again. The measure number is different from that of the score in the Song Position display, shown by pressing the [REW]/[FF] buttons. • This happens when playing back music data for which a speciﬁc, ﬁxed tempo is set.
Appendix

When playing back a Song, some channels do not play. • Playback of these channels may be set to “OFF.” Turn playback on for those channels that are set to “OFF” (page 137). A Song to which write-protect has been applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song name) cannot be moved to an ID SmartMedia card. • If you are using an external card reader, write-protected Songs cannot be moved to an ID SmartMedia card. Use the card slot on this instrument. The Tuning Curve of the piano Voice does not quite match that of other instruments’ Voices. • The Tuning Curve designed especially for piano Voices may not sound with the appropriate pitches when used with other instrument Voices. Set the Tuning Curve to “FLAT” (page 94).

Guide
The melody still plays back, even when specifying Track 1 as the part to be muted for one-handed practice. • A part other than the melody part has been assigned to Track 1. Reassign the channel containing the melody to Track 1 (page 136). The Guide lamps do not light during Song playback, even after pressing the [GUIDE] button. • Make sure to turn on the Guide lamps (page 135). • Any notes outside of the 88-key range cannot be indicated by the Guide lamps. The Guide lamps light an octave or two lower/higher than the actual pitch. • The Guide lamps sometimes light an octave or two lower/higher than the actual pitch depending on the selected Voice. The lamps in the chord section of the keyboard light. • The Guide function for chords (page 49) has been enabled. Turn the Style off by pressing the [ACMP ON/ OFF] button. The Guide lamps do not indicate how to play chords. • Make sure that the Guide Mode is set to “FollowLights” (page 102). • You cannot check how to play chords with the Guide lamps if the chord ﬁngering method is set to “Single Finger,” “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.” Select another ﬁngering method (page 102).

In the AB Repeat function, the B point cannot be set. • The A point has not been set. Set the B point only after setting the A point.

204

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

Score
When displaying the music score, long notes that have been entered, such as whole notes and ties, are not displayed correctly. • Long notes, such as whole notes and ties, may not be shown in the music score display exactly as they were entered. To have a more accurate display of these notes, select “Tenuto” by pressing the [H] button before inputting each note in the Step Record display (page 141). The tempo, beat, measure and music notation is not displayed correctly. • Some Song data for the Clavinova has been recorded with special “free tempo” settings. For such Song data, the tempo, beat, measure and music notation will not be displayed correctly. The note name partially obscures the note in the display. • When several notes occur close to each other, the note name may obscure the note at left. The music score of the right-hand/left-hand part is not displayed. • The appropriate channels have not been assigned to the right-hand and left-hand parts. Set RIGHT and LEFT to the appropriate channels (page 38). The notation in the display is cut off, with the middle of a measure starting on the next line. • When all the notes of a measure cannot ﬁt on one line, the remaining notes in the measure are carried over to the next line. Dotted notes are indicated as rests. • This is normal; sometimes dotted notes are indicated as rests. Chords are not displayed. • If the selected Song does not contain chord data, chords are not displayed.

Video out
The Clavinova display contents cannot be sent via video out and do not show on an external monitor. • Make sure that the NTSC or PAL setting corresponds to the standard of your particular video equipment (page 53). Some ﬂashing parallel lines appear in the television or video monitor. • Occasionally some ﬂashing parallel lines may appear in the television or video monitor. This does not necessarily indicate that the monitor is malfunctioning. For optimum results, try adjusting the color settings on the monitor itself. The monitor you are using may not show the instrument's display contents as expected. • Keep in mind that even after adjusting all settings as recommended, the monitor you are using may not show the instrument's display contents as expected (e.g., the display contents may not ﬁt on the screen, the characters may not be completely clear, or the colors may be incorrect).

Microphone/Vocal harmony
The microphone input signal cannot be recorded. • The microphone input signal cannot be recorded to the instrument. However, you can connect a recorder to the output terminals [AUX OUT, AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED), OPTICAL OUT] and record the microphone signal. Harmony can be heard in addition to the microphone sound. • Vocal Harmony is set to “ON.” Turn Vocal Harmony off (page 54). The Vocal Harmony effect sounds distorted or out-oftune. Your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous sounds, such as the Style sound from the instrument. In particular, bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal Harmony. To remedy this: • Sing as closely to the microphone as possible. • Use a directional microphone. • Turn down the Master volume, Style volume, or Song volume control (page 39). • Separate the microphone from the external speakers as much as possible. • Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the MICROPHONE SETTING display (page 165). • Raise the microphone input level (TH) via the Compressor function in the MICROPHONE SETTING display (page 166). Appropriate harmony notes are not produced by the Vocal Harmony feature. • Make sure you are using the appropriate method to specify the harmony notes for the current Vocal Harmony mode (page 167).

Lyrics (Karaoke)
Lyrics are not displayed. • If the selected Song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. Some of the lyrics overlap each other. • This happens for Songs containing many lyrics. The Lyrics Background setting cannot be changed. • When the background color is speciﬁed in the song data, the Lyrics Background setting cannot be changed.

Appendix

Performance assistant technology
Performance assistant technology does not work appropriately. • Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop Song playback, then set the [ACMP ON/OFF] and PART ON/OFF [LEFT] to off. Finally, restart the Song.

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

205

CVP-309 grand piano type: Keyboard Stand Assembly
CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can damage the stand. • Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing the assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.

How to position the main unit
CAUTION Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers. Large soft cloth Protective pad Floppy disk drive

Floppy disk drive

Protective pad

n
The CVP-309 grand piano type features an iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect. This produces sound from the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova, enhancing the reverberation and spaciousness of the sound when you open the lid with the longer stay (page 16). In order to optimize the iAFC effect, please observe the following: • Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on the power of the Clavinova for the ﬁrst time, and after each time you re-locate the Clavinova (page 77). • Do not block the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova.

1 Spread a large soft cloth such as a blanket on the ﬂoor in front of the wall. 2 Place a protective pad on the soft cloth, so that, when you place the main unit ﬂat on the ﬂoor with its keyboard side facing the wall, the pad will be located about 10cm (a little more than four inches) to the high key side from the ﬂoppy disk drive as shown in the illustration. The pad will protect the ﬂoppy disk drive so that it will not be damaged by touching the ﬂoor. 3 As shown in the illustration, place the main unit ﬂat on the ﬂoor so that half of the pad underneath protrudes from the keyboard side of the unit, and at the same time the pad is located about 10cm to the high key side from the ﬂoppy disk drive. Then raise the rear of the main unit until it leans against the wall with the keyboard side at the bottom. Be careful not to allow the unit to fall or slip. Place a soft cloth against the wall to protect the unit and the wall from scratches.
CAUTION

1

Remove all parts from the box. Conﬁrm that all parts shown in the illustration are included.

Main unit

CAUTION To prevent the key cover from accidentally opening during assembly, press down on the key cover, making sure that the sheet (shown) remain in place. 6 × 40 mm ﬁxing screws × 12

Be sure to use a protective pad to avoid a damage to the ﬂoppy disk drive. If the drive touches the ﬂoor when you raise the unit to lean it against the wall, too much pressure may be applied to the drive, possibly causing serious damages to the drive. CAUTION • Do not place the main unit with the rear side facing down. Incorrect

Legs

Pedal box

6 × 20 mm ﬁxing screws × 4

• Do not lay the main unit upside down on the ﬂoor. Incorrect • Do not position the main unit so that its bottom is in contact with ﬂoor.

Appendix

AC power cord

Cord holder

Incorrect

Protective pad

206

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

2

Attach two front legs and a rear leg. Refer to the diagram below to verify the orientation of the legs.

4 Attach the cord holder on the unit as shown in the illustration below, then use the cord holder to afﬁx the pedal cord. 3

Rear leg

Front leg

Front leg

1 Install and tighten four screws on each leg, starting with one of the front legs.
6 × 40 mm ﬁxing screws

Raising the unit to the standing position. Use the front legs as support to raise the unit.
CAUTION

• Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers. • When you raise the unit, do not hold the key cover.

3

Install the pedal box. 1 Remove the twist tie that afﬁxes the pedal cord to the upper portion of the pedal box.

Twist tie

2 Align the cord with the groove on the unit, and attach the pedal box using four screws.

5

Set the voltage selector and connect the power cord.

240

110

6 × 20 mm ﬁxing screws

3 Insert the pedal cord plug into the pedal connector. Insert the plug so the arrow side faces front (toward the keyboard). If the plug will not go in easily, do not force it. Double-check the orientation of the plug, then try again.

Left of the rear leg on the bottom of the main unit, when viewed from front

CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual

127 220

Appendix

207

Appendix
208
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. After the proper voltage has been selected. Top portion
7
Install the Floppy Disk Drive. • Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable ﬁxtures? → Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location. To set the selector for 110V. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area. WARNING An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. Rotate the adjuster until it comes in ﬁrm contact with the ﬂoor surface. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury.Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord. always hold the bottom of the main unit. use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. • Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? → Tighten all screws. Connect the USB cable to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? → Check the connection.
CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. Do not hold here.
Key cover Do not hold here.
When moving the instrument after assembly. 127V. please check the following.
6
Set the adjuster.
■ After completing the assembly. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? → Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly against the ﬂoor.
• Are there any parts left over? → Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. 220V or 240V main voltages. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard.

CAUTION To prevent the key cover from accidentally opening during assembly. and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. pleting assembly of each unit.
If the screw holes do not align.
4(CVP-309) Slowly tilt the main unit forward until front legs reach the ﬂoor.
Front leg (left)
Rear leg
Front leg (right)
Pedal box
Bundled pedal cord inside
AC power cord
Protective pad (CVP-309)
5x18 mm ﬁxing screws × 14
2
(CVP-307)
With the key cover closed and the keyboard side on the bottom.
2 Fix the front right leg to the speaker box using two screws. When raising the unit. Doing so may damage the speaker inside. reverse the assembly sequence given below.CVP-309/307: Keyboard Stand Assembly
CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts. 4 Raise the rear of the main unit until it leans against the wall. Incorrect
3 Fix the front left leg in the same way. Place the unit on the cloth with the keyboard side on the bottom and lean the unit against the wall so that the unit will not fall or slip. Be careful not to allow the unit to fall or slip.
Front leg (left)
Front leg (right)
1 Fix the front right leg to the bottom surface of the unit using two screws. support the music rest with your hand so that the music rest will not fall. Be sure to position the keyboard side on the bottom. Conﬁrm that all parts shown in the illustration are provided. • Be sure to use the correct screw size. lean the unit against the wall. When you lean the unit against the wall.
Spread a large soft cloth. and is located about 10cm (a little more than four inches) to the high key side from the ﬂoppy disk drive. press down on the key cover.
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
209
. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • To disassemble. CAUTION • Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers. Also. such as a blanket. 3 Place a protective pad on the soft cloth. place the keyboard side at the bottom and make it sit on the protective pad. when you place the main unit on the ﬂoor with its keyboard side touching the ﬂoor. too much pressure may be applied to the drive. CAUTION • Do not place the main unit with the rear side facing down. as indicated below. 2 Place the main unit on the soft cloth with its keyboard side facing the wall.
Remove all parts from the box. insert the soft cloth between the main unit and the wall to protect the unit from being damaged by hitting the wall or any other object. If the drive touches the ﬂoor when you raise the unit to lean it against the wall.
CAUTION Please do not touch the speaker net. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.
(CVP-309)
Protective pad Floppy disk drive
Large soft cloth
Floppy disk drive
Protective pad
1
1 Spread a large soft cloth such as a blanket on the ﬂoor in front of the wall. The pad will protect the ﬂoppy disk drive so that it will not be damaged by touching the ﬂoor. so that. making sure that the sheet (shown) remain in place. • Be sure to tighten up Have a Phillips-head (+) screwall screws upon comdriver ready. Place a soft cloth against the wall to protect the instrument and wall from scratches.
CAUTION Be sure to use a protective pad to avoid a damage to the ﬂoppy disk drive. • The top part of the music rest is not ﬁxed. loosen the other screws and adjust the position of the front leg.
3
Attach the front legs. possibly causing serious damages to the drive. on the ﬂoor. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. the pad comes under the keyboard side.
Appendix
Incorrect • Do not lay the main unit upside-down on the ﬂoor.

then try again.
Incorrect
8
Set the voltage selector and connect the power cord. 2 Align the pedal cord into the groove on the rear leg.
If the screw holes do not align. do not force it.4
Attach the rear leg. then afﬁx the pedal box using two screws.
Appendix
4 Make sure that the pedal box lays ﬂat. and install the plastic cover onto the groove. Insert the plug with the arrow-printed side facing front (toward the keyboard side). with no gap between itself and the ﬂoor. 1 Insert the pedal cord plug into the pedal connector.
1 Remove the plastic cover from the rear legs.
240
6
(the bottom of the right side as seen from the front)
110
. • When you raise the unit.
1 Fix the rear legs to the bottom surface of the unit using two screws. use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 220V or 240V main voltages. do not hold the key cover.
5
Raising the unit to the standing position. Be careful not to insert the cover’s attachment strip between the groove wall and the leg.
2 Untie and straighten out the bundled cord attached to the bottom of the pedal box. To set the selector for 110V. 2 Fix the rear legs to the speaker box using two screws.
7
Connect the pedal cord. Double-check the orientation of the plug. If the plug will not go in easily. WARNING An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. Use the front legs as support to raise the unit. 127V. loosen the other screws and adjust the position of the rear legs. connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas.
127
Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord.
210
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
220
Installing the pedal box.
CAUTION
Correct
• Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers.
3 Pass the pedal cord between the pedal box and the rear leg. After the proper voltage has been selected.

Top portion
Do not hold here. refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws.
When moving the instrument after assembly. Rotate the adjuster until it comes in ﬁrm contact with the ﬂoor surface.
Appendix
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
211
.
Key cover Do not hold here.
■ After completing the assembly.
10 (CVP-309)
Connect the USB cable of ﬂoppy disk drive to [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. please check the following. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury.9
Set the adjuster.
• Are there any parts left over? → Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? → Tighten all screws. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? → Check the connection.
CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. always hold the bottom of the main unit. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? → Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly against the ﬂoor. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard. Hold here. • Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable ﬁxtures? → Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location.

and ﬁt the ﬂoppy disk drive into the case. For a list of optional ﬂoppy disk drives available for this instrument.
3
Attach the drive and case assembly to the left underside of the instrument.
4
Dual-sided adhesive tape
Connect the USB cable to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. see “Optional Accessories” (page 214).
2
Fold the USB cable inside the case as shown.Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Included/Optional)
The ﬂoppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of the instrument by using the included ﬂoppy disk drive case and screws. with the side having the rubber stoppers facing the case. using the included four screws (4 mm x 10 mm).
Appendix
212
CVP-309/307 Owner’s Manual
. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.
1
Remove the three backing papers from the adhesive tape in the case.
Insert the drive to the case.

contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. sink. If the problem persists. This product.
Main Power Supply Veriﬁcation: Yamaha products are manufactured speciﬁcally for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. the larger the current handling capacity. please contact your dealer for supply voltage veriﬁcation and (if applicable) instructions. The power supply cord has been damaged. basic precautions should always be followed. or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.
Read all Safety Instructions. it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required.
This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). For longer extension cords. please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product.
6. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet. If a cart. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided. unless speciﬁcally designed for enclosed installations. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided. the shorter the time period before damage occurs. turn the plug over and try again. or e. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a
qualiﬁed service person when: a. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional ﬁxtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. spa. Installation Instructions. including connection to the main supply. or the enclosure of the product has been damaged. radiators. either alone or in combination with an ampliﬁer and headphones or speaker/s. or stand is used. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. The product has been dropped.
3. a cart.
Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not signiﬁcantly contribute to their operating temperature.
The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. or speciﬁcally recommended by Yamaha.
Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears.
9. the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. trip over. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. Special Message Section items. Examples of wet/damp locations are.
4. or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings. Objects have fallen.
WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on. consult a local electrician. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions.
7. or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. or c.
15. These precautions include. rack.
Ventilation: Electronic products. may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activity. The product has been exposed to rain: or d. 14. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound. been inserted. All other servicing should be referred to qualiﬁed service personnel. tub. exhibits a marked change in performance. near a swimming pool. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting ﬁxtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. you should consult an audiologist.
WARNING. and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections. or b. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number.
12. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual. No other uses are recommended. but are not limited to.
2.
1.When using any electrical or electronic product. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed.
11. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as. or wet basement.
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-469-2
. on the name plate. should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area. ELECTRICAL SHOCK. AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.
This product should be used only with the components supplied or. the following:
This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. The product dose not operate.IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord. rack. For name plate location. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.
13. If you should move.
8.
5.
10.

INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.)
1. granted by the FCC.
(polarity) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer.FCC INFORMATION (U. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product.
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”. Follow all installation instructions.org
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains a small amount of mercury.eiae. CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations. Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. 6600 Orangethorpe Ave. 2. please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. (mercury)
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK. meets FCC requirements. 3.
(class B)
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s. Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority. please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead. Electronic Service Division. Buena Park.
. FULLY INSERT. If this product is found to be the source of interference. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. to use the product. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual.A. ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES. In the case of radio or TV interference. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. For disposal information in the United States. refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site: www. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and. please contact Yamaha Corporation of America.) Ltd. MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT. when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. relocate/reorient the antenna. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations.K.S.
(2 wires) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.